AUTOMATED CONTINUOUS AND RANDOM ACCESS ANALYTICAL SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS THEREOF

Abstract: An automated, continuous and random access analytical system, having apparatus and methodology capable of simultaneously performing multiple assays of liquid samples using different assay methodologies, and providing continuous and random access while performing a plurality of different assays on the same or different samples during the same time period, is disclosed. A method is also disclosed of operating an automated continuous and random access analytical system capable of simultaneously effecting multiple assays of a plurality of liquid samples wherein scheduling of various assays of the plurality of liquid samples is followed by creating a unit dose disposable and separately transferring a first liquid sample and reagents to a reaction vessel without initiation of an assay reaction sequence, followed by physical transfer of the unit dose disposable to a processing workstation, whereby a mixture of the unit dose disposable reagents and sample are achieved during incubation. The system is capable of performing more than one scheduled assay in any order, and assays where more than such scheduled assays are presented. The automated, continuous and random access analytical system is also capable of analyzing the incubated reaction mixtures independently and individually by at least two assay procedures.

Description: AUTOMATED CONTINUOUS AND RANDOM ACCESS ANALYTICAL SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS THEREOF This application is a continuation-in-part of U. S. Serial No. 07/859,218, filed March 27, 1992. This application is. also continuation-in-part application of the following U.S. Serial Numbers: 07/915,162 07/915, 163 07/915,164; 07/915, 166; 07/915, 167; 07/915, 168 07/916,425; 07/916,551; 07/916,556; 07/916, 737 07/917,253; and 07/917,634; all being filed on July 20, 1992, and all being continuation-in-part applications of U.S. Serial No. 07/859,218, filed on March 27, 1992. This application is also a continuation-in-part application of the following U. S. Serial Numbers: 08/027,268; 08/027,270; 08/027,387; 08/027,388; and 08/027,481; all being filed on March 18, 1993, and all being continuation-in-part applications of U.S. Serial No. 07/859,218, filed on March 27, 1992. This application is also a continuation-in-part application of U. S. Serial No. 08/027,269, filed on March 18, 1993, which is a continuation-in-part application of U. S. Serial No. 07/917, 634, filed on July 20, 1992, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Serial No. 07/859,218, filed on March 27, 1992. This application is also a continuation-in-part of U. S. Serial No. 08/027, 482, filed on March 18, 1993, which is a continuation-in- part of U.S. Serial No. 07/916,556, filed on July 20, 1992, which is a continuation-in-part of U. S. Serial No. 07/859,218, filed on March 27, 1992. Field of the Invention The present invention relates to an automated analytical system and method for the analysis of liquid test samples. In another aspect, the invention is related to a random access system capable of simultaneously performing a plurality of assays, particularly heterogeneous and/or homogeneous immunoassays, which system is also a continuous system in that the system may be additionally or alternatively loaded at any time with samples and yet maintain continuous and uninterrupted assay operations. In yet another aspect, the present i vention relates to the various components incorporated into and utilized by such system. Background of the Invention The Automated Analytical System Although various known clinical analyzers for chemical, immunochemical and biological testing of samples are available, clinical technology is rapidly changing due to increasing demands in the clinical laboratory to provide new levels of service. These new levels of service must be more cost effective to decrease the operating expenditures such as labor cost and the like, and..must provide shorter turnaround time of test results to reduce the patient' s length of stay in the hospital as well as improve efficiency of outpatient treatment. Modernization of analytical apparatus and procedures demands consolidation of work stations to meet the growing challenge placed on clinical laboratories. Generally, analysis of a test sample involves the reaction of test samples with one or more reagents with respect to one or more analytes wherein it is frequently desired that the analysis be performed on a selective basis with respect to each test sample. However, due to the high demands placed on clinical laboratories regarding not only volume throughput but also the number and frequency of various analyses, there is a need to provide an automated analysis system which is capable of combining accurate analytical results, multiple test menu versatility, low reagent and fluids loss and consumption, and of great benefit and importance, continuous and high throughput. The present automated clinical analysis systems provide much improved accuracy of analytical results in comparison with accuracies of earlier systems. In the present systems, analysis of a test sample typically involves forming a reaction mixture comprising the test sample and one or more reagents, and the reaction mixture is then analyzed by an apparatus for one or more characteristics of the test sample. Reliance on automated clinical analyzers has improved the efficiency of the laboratory procedures, inasmuch as the technician has fewer tasks to perform. Automated clinical analyzers provide results much more rapidly while frequently avoiding operator or technician error, thus placing emphasis on accuracy and repeatability of a variety of tests. Automated clinical analyzers presently available for routine laboratory tests include a transport or conveyor system designed to transport containers of sample liquids between various operating stations. For example, a reaction tube or cuvette containing a test sample may pass through a reagent filling station, mixing station, reaction forming station, detection stations, analysis stations, and the like. Such present transport systems are, however, not flexible in that transport is in one direction and the reaction tubes or cuvettes, once inserted into the apparatus, must pass through without access before analysis occurs. Even further, the present transport systems allow only batch-like operation in that once the system is initially loaded, testing may only be performed on the initially loaded samples during a single operation cycle; alternative or additional samples can not be loaded during the operation cycle to allow continuing operations for extended periods. As for multiple test menu versatility, some of the presently available automated clinical analyzers, such as automated immunoassay analyzers like the Abbott IMx® analyzer and the Abbott TDx® analyzer (Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, Illinois, USA), utilize procedures involving a variety of different assay steps. These present systems have typically relied on detection and measurement of optical changes in a reaction mixture during the assay process. For example, a number of well-known techniques using single or raulti-wavelength fluorescence include fluorescent polarization immunoassays (FPIA) employing homogeneous immunoassay techniques, microparticle enzyme immunoassays (MEIA) employing heterogeneous immunoassay techniques, and the like. The MEIA technology, such as that used on the Abbott IMx® analyzer, is used for high and low molecular weight analytes requiring greater sensitivity, and FPIA technology, such as that used on the Abbott TDx® analyzer, is used primarily for lower molecular weight analytes. A front surface fluorometer is used in these systems to quantify a fluorescent product generated in the MEIA assays, while a fluorescence polarization optical system is used to quantify the degree of tracer binding to antibody in the FPIA assays. The test samples are automatically processed in certain of these systems, such as the Abbott IMx® analyzer and Abbott TDx® analyzer, by a robotic arm with a pipetting probe and a rotating carousel which positions the samples for processing. These systems are typically compact table-top analyzers which offer fully automated, walk-away immunoassay testing capabilities for both routine and specialized immunoassays. These nonisotopic methods eliminate radioactivity disposal problems and increase reagent shelf life while meeting the diverse requirements of a multitude of different assays. Though these presently available automated clinical analyzers provide a degree of improved multiple test menu versatility in comparison to earlier systems and practices, the present analyzers remain limited in that these systems are one direction only systems, or batch analyzers, which permit the analysis of multiple samples and provide for access to the test samples for the formation of subsequent reaction mixtures, but permit only one type of analysis at a time. It would, thus, be an improvement to provide a random access analyzer which allows for analysis of multiple test samples for multiple analytes. It would be an even further improvement if such a random access analyzer allowed for continuous operations; that is, if additional or alternative samples could be loaded for analysis during analysis operations by the system, without interruption of the analysis operations. With respect to reagent and fluids consumption and loss in present automated clinical analyzers, a common feature of those analyzers is the inclusion of various reagents within the apparatus itself or placed near the apparatus for pipetting purposes. In these systems, liquid reagents, in bulk form, are selected for the various types of tests which are to be performed on the test sample, and are stored in or near the apparatus. Reagent delivery units, such as pumps and the like, along with valves, control and pipette mechanisms, are included in the present automated analyzers so that different reagents can be mixed according to the type of test to be performed. In certain of these present analyzers, for example, the Abbott IMx® analyzer previously mentioned, all the steps required for analysis of test samples are automatically performed and those steps include numerous checks of the subsystems to insure that assays are run to completion with valid results. In the Abbott IMx ® in particular, quantification of the fluorescence intensity in the MEIA method and polarization in the FPIA method, as well as the final data reduction, are fully automated on the analyzer and results are printed by the analyzer and may be accessed through suitable means for automatic data collection by a laboratory computer. These various aspects of the present automated clinical analyzers, like the Abbott IMx ® , help limit reagent and fluids consumption and loss, as well as provide other advantages. Even with those advantages, however, improvement in reagent and fluids consumption and loss in an " analysis system would be desirable. Even further, such improvement in consumption and loss by these, combined with benefits of continuous operations, accuracy of results, and test menu versatility would be a significant improvement in the art. With respect to continuous and high throughput in automated analytical systems, the prior systems have been unable to provide these desirable characteristics. In the prior automated analytical systems, the systems are initially loaded with a plurality of test samples. The samples are then each tested during a full cycle of testing by the systems. Though the number of samples which may be initially loaded in these systems is fairly large, it is not possible to load additional test samples in these systems at the same time the systems are testing the initial load. Additional samples may only be loaded after testing of the prior sample load is complete. In order to increase throughput in these systems then, it would be advantageous to provide an automated analytical system which allowed for loading of additional samples at any time, even while the system is testing other samples. It would be an even further advantage if such a system could provide accurate results, multiple test menu versatility, and low reagent and fluids loss and consumption while at the same time allowing continuous access to and testing of samples. The prior systems have been unable to provide these advantages. The present automated continuous and random access system provides all these advantages. In addition to those advantages, the present invention also provides additional improvements directed to specific aspects, parts, and operations of these' systems. Specific Aspects, Parts, and Operations Other benefits and advantages, in addition to those previously described (i. e. , accurate analytical results, multiple test menu versatility, low reagent and fluids consumption and loss, and continuous and high throughput), directed to specific aspects, parts, and operations of automated clinical analyzers would also be improvements in the art. A. Detection Systems: For example, an improved analyzer might incorporate capability to perform both homogeneous and heterogeneous assays. Automated analytical apparatus for performing homogeneous assays, the detection of precipitate formed by reaction between antigens and antibodies in. a test sample-cell to form light scattering centers, and methods and apparatus for detecting immunological agglutination reactions are known in the art. Such apparatus and methods include, for example, the steps of measuring light absorption of the liquid medium with antibody before and after the antigen-antibody reaction by using light which is absorbable by the antibody, and calculating the difference of the absorptions. In this way, the presence or absence of agglutination is detected based on the fact that the agglutination reaction reduces the concentration of antibody, which affects the light absorption of the liquid medium. As is typical of methods and apparatus for performing homogeneous assays, these procedures do not require separation of a solid phase from the reaction mixture for further analysis. Heterogeneous assays are also known through the use of a sample analyzer for quantitating relatively small amounts of clinically significant compounds in a liquid test sample by focusing a light source onto the sample so that, for example, fluorescent particles in the sample cause fluorescent conditions, the intensity of which is the function of the intensity of the light beam and the concentration of fluorescent particles in the sample. A detector senses photons forming the fluorescent emissions of the particles when excited by the light beam. The introduction of a solid phase material into the sample requires subsequent separation of the solid phase from the reaction mixture for further analysis and before the fluorescent emissions can be detected and measured. It would be advantageous in an automated clinical analyzer to incorporate apparatus and methods for performing, selectively on the same sample, various homogeneous and heterogeneous assays concurrently in a random access fashion. Such apparatus and methods could provide for the analysis of a plurality of liquid samples wherein each sample is analyzed with respect to at least one analyte utilizing both homogeneous and heterogeneous assay techniques. B. Syringe Bubble Flusher: Another possible benefit and advantage directed to specific aspects, parts, and operations of automated clinical analyzers involves the precision and accuracy of the fluidics within the automated analytical instrument. That precision and accuracy during assay procedures is closely related to the precision and accuracy with which fluids can be aspirated and dispensed by the instrument. Although a syringe or similar device within the instrument can provide aspirating and dispensing steps, performance of prior syringes is often severely degraded by the presence of air bubbles in.the syringe. Existing construction and designs of such syringes have failed to provide . efficient means of removing such bubbles. For example, various relatively ineffective and cumbersome manual techniques and manipulations, such as abruptly tapping the syringe, and the like, have been used to flush bubbles out of the syringe. Thus, there remains a need, and it would be, an improvement in the art, to provide an automated clinical analyzer with a fluidics system which includes a syringe or similar device to provide precise and accurate aspirations, dispensing, and bubble flushing steps while avoiding problems previously encountered in automatic flushing of bubbles completely from the fluidics system. C. Reaction Vessel and Loader: It would also be advantageous in an automated analytical instrument to provide for ease of loading and handling of test samples and reagents. Such loading and handling can be problematic, in particular, when test samples and reagents are contained in containers of varying shape and size and must be supplied to the instrument. The present invention provides improved ease of loading and handling because of the particular* containers used by the system for handling test samples and reagents, and further provides for ease of manipulation of those samples and reagents and reaction processes. In addition, the invention provides for disposable containers for those samples and reagents and other advantages, such as storage free from contaminants. D. Reagent Cap Actuator: . Even other benefits and advantages directed to specific aspects, parts, and operations of automated clinical analyzers are possible. Prior methods for reducing evaporation of costly reagents from system containers have utilized manual operations to cap reagent containers, as well as use of various other reclosing container caps which are held open during liquid access cycle and then allowed to reseal by removing the opening force. It would be an improvement in automated clinical analyzers to provide apparatus and methods wherein computer-controlled robotic devices replace the need for manual intervention in these regards. Those devices could be beneficial and advantageous if capable of minimizing reagent evaporation. E. Cartridge. Feeder and Carton: Further benefits and advantages of specific aspects, parts, and operations of automated clinical analyzers are also desirable. The diagnostics industry has heretofore routinely utilized several types of systems which each require hand loading of cartridges, reagent packs, .and sample containers into batch and semi-automatic instruments. In an automated, continuous and random access analytical system, manual hand loading of such items is further complicated when dealing with volume and reliability concerns. It would clearly be an improvement, then, to incorporate in these automated clinical analyzers an automatic feeder, capable of feeding tubular parts, such as cartridges, and orientating the cartridges with an open end up. An automatic cartridge feeder hopper of multiple cartridges could save substantial operator time and error since multiple cartridges could be loaded into the hopper feeder system directly from the cartridge packaging systems, eliminating individual hand feeding of the cartridges, and assuring reliability within the automated diagnostic system. Moreover, it would be advantageous to provide in these systems various handling and loading means to facilitate the handling and loading of reaction vessels which are utilized with systems. F. Sample Container Segment: The invention even further provides advantageous mechanisms for loading particular containers. These mechanisms are of great importance because small, non- uniform containers are necessary in certain instances. Where many of these containers must be employed, it becomes hard, if not impossible, for an operator to maintain adequate supply to the instrument if loading and positioning of the containers is largely manual. The present invention provides improved containers and loading mechanisms to allow easy and continuous loading and processing capability. G. Optics Control System: A further aspect in which improvement would be beneficial is optics and optic controls utilized by automated analytical systems. Measurements and other operations performed by these systems often employ characterization of relative optical properties. Because accuracy of these measurements and operations depend upon aspects of the optical system, the optical system must function in a reliable manner, particularly in an automated and continuous system in which a multitude of simultaneous operations are being performed in addition to the optical measurements. H. Smart Wash: In automated analytical instruments, one particular area of concern has been carryover by or cross contamination of the samples, regiments, and other fluids. Typically, some form of wash is employed in these devices to wash apparatus between steps when switching between different fluid substances. The approach former employed has often been to maximize the amount of wash to account for the worst case scenario of potential contamination. It would be an improvement to provide a variable wash mechanism that operates according to the degree of potential contamination to insure no contamination, but yet conserves wash fluids and other resources. I. Chemiluminescent Test: Chemiluminescent testing is generally known. In fact, chemiluminescent testing has been employed in certain automated analytical systems. It appears, however, that chemiluminescent testing has not been employed in a continuous and random access system. It would be an advantage to provide a continuous and random access analytical system suitable for chemiluminescent testing. J. Sample Segment Container: The often differing sizes and configurations of containers employed, with automated analytical systems presents special problems. Also, keeping track of those containers and their contents has required significant resources. It would be advantageous to provide means in an automated analytical system for handling and identifying containers. K. Liquid .Level Sensor: Yet another aspect of automated clinical analyzers which could be advantageously improved is the liquids measurement systems. In particular, a liquid level sense mechanism employed for sensing fluid levels in various sample containers is desired in . those analyzers. The present invention provides a new fluid level -sensing system to allow for liquids measurement. Such system is an improvement in the art. The present invention, an automated continuous and random,access analytical system and components thereof, provides for the primary capabilities missing from the prior art automated clinical analyzers; that is, the present system combines accurate analytical result capability, multiple test menu versatility, low reagent and fluids loss and consumption, and continuous and high throughput. Because the present invention provides those capabilities, the invention is a significant improvement in the art. In addition to those capabilities, however, the present invention provides other benefits and advantages over the prior systems. Those benefits and advantages, in certain instances being directed to specific aspects, parts, and operations in an automated continuous and random access analytical system, provide much improvement in that particular system, as well as in numerous and varied possible applications. Summary of the Invention The automated analytical system of the present invention is capable of simultaneously performing two or more assays on a plurality of "test samples in a continuous and random access fashion. In particular, the automated immunoassay analytical " system apparatus of the invention can be viewed as a microprocessor based system of integrated subaεεemblies with different groups of assays being continuously run through separate and changeable software modules. The microprocessor based system uses robotic arm pipetters with two degrees of freedom and bi-directional rotating carousels to process samples. Critical assay steps such as incubations, washes and specimen dilution are performed automatically by the instrument as scheduled. The scheduling provided by the system allows for continued operation as desired, since kitting operations and processing operations are independent. Even where continued operation requires addition or alteration of samples placed in the kitting area, the scheduling functions to cause the system to process an optimum throughput in the least amount of time. According to the invention, an automated continuous and random access analytical system, capable of simultaneously effecting multiple assays of a plurality of liquid samples, is provided. The invention enables performing a method wherein various assays are scheduled for a plurality of liquid samples. Through kitting means,, the present system is capable of creating a unit dose disposable by separately transferring liquid sample and reagents to a reaction vessel without initiation of an assay reaction sequence. From the kitting means, multiple, kitted unit dose disposables are transferred to a process area, wherein an aliquot is mixed for each independent sample with one or more liquid reagents at different times in a reaction vessel to form independent reaction mixtures. Independent scheduling of such kitting and mixing is achieved during incubation of the multiple reaction mixtures, simultaneously and independently. The system of the present invention is capable of performing more than one scheduled assay in any order in which a plurality of scheduled assays is presented. The incubated reaction mixtures are analyzed independently and individually by at least two assay procedures which are previously scheduled. The automated continuous and random access analytical system apparatus of this invention is comprised of a front end carousel assembly inclusive of a sample cup carousel, a reagent pack carousel and a reaction vessel carousel mounted concentrically and serviced by a transfer pipetting means suitable for kitting and/or mixing reagents with a sample. The kitted and pipetted reaction vessels are transferred through a transfer station which provides means for transferring the kitted and pipetted reaction vessels to a processing work station which includes a controlled environment for maintaining temperature and provides timing for mixing of reagents and incubation. At least two assay procedural apparatus are provided which are scheduled for the various samples and kitted reagents in a unit dose disposable means for analyzing the incubated reaction mixtures. The unit dose disposable reaction vessels are removed from the process carousel by operation of the transfer station, which includes means for removing the disposable reaction vessel from the system. Additional advantages and novel features of the invention will be set forth in part in the description which follows, and will become apparent to those skilled in the art upon examination of the following or may be learned by practice of the invention. The objects and advantages of the invention may be obtained by means of the exemplary combinations more particularly pointed out in the following .specification and appended claims, including all equivalents thereof. Brief Description.■of the Drawings FIG. 1 is an isometric view of the automated analytical system illustrating the system cabinetry, exposed front end carousel, computer screen and keyboard. FIG. 2 is an isometric view of the automated analytical system apparatus frame and cabinet. FIG. 3 is a top plan view in section of the lower cabinet of FIGS. 1 and 2 illustrating water and/or buffer supply station as well as liquid and solid waster containers of the automated analytical system. FIG. 4A is a top plan view of the automated analytical system in section with component covers removed to show the automated analytical system apparatus in detail and relative position. FIG. 4B is a front elevational view of the automated analytical system in isolation and partial section of elements of the front end carousel. FIG. 5 is a top view in isolation and partial section of drive and guide elements of the front end carousel of the automated analytical system being removed. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional side view of a process carousel of the automated analytical system in isolation with two reaction vessels in place, one of which is in position for an FPIA read. FIG. 7 is an. isometric view of the probe, probe arm and pipettor of the automated analytical system in isolation. FIG. 8 is .a schematic side view of the probe arm wiring and sensor means of the automated analytical system. FIG. 9A is a sectional side view of the transfer element of the automated analytical system engaging a reaction vessel for transfer from the main carousel into the transfer station. FIG. 9B is a perspective side elevational view of the transfer station of the automated analytical system. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the sequence of activities to be performed in a first assay. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the sequence of activities to be performed in a second assay. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an incubation period between two activities as comprising a nominal incubation period and a variable incubation window. FIG. 13 is a set of six block diagrams each showing a different combination of activities and incubation periods reflecting the rules of a flexible protocol technology. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the timing protocol for a pipetting activity. FIG. 15 is a top plan view of the automated analytical system in section with component covers removed to show the automated analytical apparatus in detail and relative position inclusive of a chemiluminescent reader for a magnetic particle capture technology and a chemiluminescent reader for membrane particle capture technology. FIG. 16 is a cross sectional view of a detection head of the detection device for chemiluminescent detection. FIG. 17 is a cross sectional view in section of the detection device light pipe positioned over a chemiluminescent particle capture container with light shield in place. FIG. 18 is a simplified block diagram of the preferred embodiment of the liquid level sensing device of the present invention utilized in connection with an automated analytical system. FIG. 19 is a more detailed block diagram of the liquid level sensing system of FIG. 18. FIG. 20 is a simplified schematic diagram illustrating the current flow in the fluid level sensing system of the present invention. FIG. 21 is an illustration of the geometries between the probe, its electromagnetic field, a liquid sample container, and the antenna when the probe is in air. FIG. 22 is an illustration of the geometries between the probe, its electromagnetic field, a liquid sample container, and the antenna when the probe contacts liquid. FIG. 23 is an illustration of the geometries between the probe, its electromagnetic field, a liquid sample container, and the antenna when the probe has contacted liquid and the distance from the probe/liquid combination to the antenna is too great to trigger a detection. FIG. 24 is an illustration of a sensing sleeve which functions to channel the electrical signal from the probe/liquid combination to the vicinity of the receiving antenna. FIG. 25 is a graphical representation of system noise level versus signal frequency. FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional side elevational view of an automatic bubble flushing syringe of the automated analytical system. FIG. 27 is a sectional end view in isolation of the piston and bore of the automatic bubble flushing syringe of FIG. 26. FIG. 28 is a sectional side view in isolation of the syringe bore-end portion of the automatic bubble flushing syringe with the reciprocating piston near the end of travel toward,the bore end portion and a phantom position within the bore illustrating the piston withdrawal to the outward extension; FIGS. 29 and 30 represent a perspective side elevational view and partial end view of a reagent pack and reagent pack cover means for use with the automated analytical system. FIG. 31 is a top view of a reagent pack having the reagent containers covered. FIG. 32 taken along section A-A of FIG. 31 presents a side view in section taken along the line A-A of FIG. 31 illustrating a cover means in various open and closed positions. FIG. 33 is an isometric view of an open reagent vessel capping means. FIG. 34 is a perspective side elevational view of a reagent container lid opening and closing station with the reagent containers in the reagent pack having the lids opened. FIG. 35 presents a different perspective side elevation view from that of FIG. 34 wherein the reagent containers of the reagent pack are below elements of the opening and closing station with the. reagent pack lids being closed. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of a test sample container segment assembly. FIG. 37 is a bottom view of the test sample container segment assembly of FIG. 36. FIG. 38 is a cross sectional view in isolation of the sample carousel with a mounted test sample container segment assembly also in cross section. FIG. "39 is a cross sectional view of a modified sample cup with skirts. FIG. 40 is a perspective view of a short test sample Vaσutainer® tube segment assembly. FIG. 41 is a top cross sectional view of the short test sample Vacutainer® tube segment assembly taken along the line A-A of FIG. 40. FIG. 42 is a bottom view of the short test sample Vacutainer® tube segment assembly of FIG. 40. FIG. 43 is a cross sectional view of a long test sample cup adaptor with tube in place. FIG. 44 is a cross sectional view of a short test sample cup adaptor with tube in place. FIGS. 45A and 45B represent a top plan view of a reaction vessel and a side view of the reaction vessel for use with the automated analytical system, respectively, with reaction vessel compartments labeled where appropriate for FPIA processing. FIG. 45C present an end view of the reaction vessel of FIG. 45B. FIG. 46 is an isometric view in section of the reaction vessel loading device illustrating the device holding to vessels and means for mounting other vessels. FIG. 47 is a top view of the reaction vessel loading device presented in an arc which matches the radius of the reaction vessel carousel, the loading device having mounted thereon ten reaction vessels. FIG. 48 is an isometric view in section of the reaction vessel loading device illustrating the loader mounted with two reaction vessels and means for mounting other reaction vessels. FIG. 49 is a top view of the reaction vessel loading device, the reaction vessel loading device having arced linear dimensions which match the radius of the reaction vessel carousel, the loader having mounted thereon two reaction vessels and the capability of mounting eight additional reaction vessels. FIG. 50 is a schematic view illustrating the system control environment airflow and temperature control of the automated analytical system. FIG. 51 is an elevational, cross-sectional view of the process carousel as disposed in the controlled environmental zone and holding a plurality of reaction vessels. FIG. 52 is a perspective view of a heater assembly for liquid temperature control. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view through the heater assembly of FIG. 52 showing the heater element within the block. FIG. 54 is a partial cross-sectional view of the heater assembly of FIG. 52 showing liquid tubing, for example, a tubing coil within the heater assembly. FIG. 55 is a side elevational view in partial section of a MEIA cartridge for use with the automated analytical system. FIG. 56 is a side elevational view in section of a MEIA cartridge feeder of the automated analytical system. FIG. 57 is a side sectional view in isolation of the MEIA cartridge feeder-cartridge orientation pin mechanism of the cartridge feeder of FIG. 56. FIG. 58 is a side cross-sectional view in isolation of a split open cartridge carton shown in various open positions in phantom as engaged in cooperation with a cartridge hopper containing multiple cartridges. FIG. 59A is an isometric view of the cartridge carton, taken form the lower side of the cartridge carton. FIG. 59B .is a partial, isometric view of the cartridge carton, illustrating the operation of the tab opening. FIG. 60 is an isometric view of the cartridge carton, taken from the upper side of the cartridge carton. FIG. 61 is an isometric view of another embodiment of a free standing cartridge hopper showing the cartridge hopper in a detached mode suitable for loading cartridges from a cartridge carton. FIG. 62 is a schematic of the FPIA optics system of the automated analytical system. FI G. 63 is a s chemati c of the MEIA opti cs system of the automated analytical system. FIG. 64 is a box diagram of the opti cs control system of the automated analytical system. FIG. 65 is a pictorial time graph of the FPIA reader sequence of the automated analytical system. FIG. 66 is a pictorial time graph of the MEIA read s equence of the automated analytical system. FIG. 67 is a s chematic reaction sequence of a FPIA for T4 performed on the automated analytical system. FIG. 68 is a schematic reaction sequence- of a one- step s andwich MEIA performed on the automated analytical system. FI G. 69 is a s chematic reaction sequence of a two- step sandwich MEIA performed on the automated analytical system. Detailed Des cription of the I nvention The following description is divided into separate s ections with headings to more clearly describe the invention, but should not be considered as limiting the scope of the invention. DEFINITIONS The following definitions are applicable to the pres ent invention: The term " test sample" , as used herein, refers to a material suspected of containing the analyte. The test sample can be used directly as obtained from the source or following a pretreatment to modify the character of the sample. The test sample can be derived from any biological source, such as a physiological fluid, including, blood, saliva, ocular lens fluid, cerebral spinal fluid, sweat, urine, milk, ascites fluid, raucous, synovial fluid, peritoneal fluid, a niotic fluid or the like. The test sample can be pretreated prior to use, such as preparing plasma from blood, diluting viscous fluids, or the like; methods of treatment can involve filtration, distillation, concentration, inactivation of interfering components, and the addition of reagents. Besides physiological fluids, other liquid samples can be used such as water, food products . and the like for the performance of environmental or food production assays. In addition, a solid material suspected of containing the analyte can be used as the test sample. In some instances it may be beneficial to modify a solid test sample to form a liquid medium or to release the analyte. The term "analyte" or "analyte of interest", as used herein, refers to the compound or composition to be detected or measured and which has at least one epitope or binding site. The analyte can be any substance for which there exists a naturally occurring binding member or for which a binding member can be prepared. Analytes include, but are not limited to, toxins, organic compounds, proteins, peptides, microorganisms, amino acids, nucleic acids, hormones, steroids, vitamins, drugs (including those administered for therapeutic purposes as well as those administered for illicit purposes), virus particles and metabolites of or antibodies to any of the above substances. The term "analyte" also includes any antigenic substances, haptens, antibodies, macromolecules and combinations thereof. The term " anal te-analog" , as used herein, refers to a substance which cross-reacts with an analyte- specific binding member, although it may do so to a greater or lesser extent than does the analyte itself. The analyte-analog can include a modified analyte as well as a fragmented or synthetic portion of the analyte molecule, so long as the analyte-analog has at least one epitopic site in common with the analyte of interest. An example of an analyte-analog is a synthetic peptide sequence which duplicates at least one epitope of the whole-molecule analyte so that the analyte-analog can bind to an analyte-specific binding member. The term "binding member", as used herein, refers to a member of a binding pair, i. e. , two different molecules wherein one of the molecules specifically binds to the second molecule through chemical or physical means. In addition to antigen and antibody binding pair members, other binding pairs include, as examples without limitation, biotin and avidin, carbohydrates and lectins, complementary nucleotide sequences, complementary peptide sequences, effector and receptor molecules, enzyme cofactors and enzymes, enzyme inhibitors and enzymes, a peptide sequence and an antibody specific for the sequence or the entire protein, polymeric acids and bases, dyes and protein binders, peptides and specific protein binders (e. g. , ribonuclease, S-peptide and ribonuclease S-protein), and the like. Furthermore, binding pairs can include members that are analogs of the original binding member, for example, an analyte-analog or a binding member made by recombinant techniques or molecular engineering. If the binding member is an immunoreactant it can be, for example, a monoclonal or polyclonal antibody, a recombinant protein or recombinant antibody, a chi eric antibody, a mixture(s) or fragment(s) of the foregoing, as well as a preparation of such antibodies, peptides and nucleotides for which suitability for use as binding members is well known to those skilled in the art. The term "detectable moiety", as used herein, refers to any compound or conventional detectable chemical group having a detectable physical or chemical property and which can be used to label a binding member to form a conjugate therewith. Such detectable chemical group can be, but is not intended to be limited to, enzymatically active groups such as enzymes, enzyme substrates, prosthetic groups or coenzymeε; spin labels; fluoreεcers and fluorogens; chromophores and chro ogens; luminescers such as chemiluminesσers and bioluminescers; specifically bindable ligands such as biotin and avidin; electroactive species; radioiεotopes; toxins; drugs; haptens; DNA; RNA; polysaccharides; polypeptides; liposomes; colored particles and colored microparticles; and the like. The term "continuous access", as used herein, refers to the ability to add additional test samples or reagents to the automated analytical system of the present invention without the interruption of assays which are being performed b the automated analytical system of the present invention at the time of such addition. The term "random access", . as used herein, refers to the ability of the automated analytical system of the present invention to simultaneously perform more than one scheduled assay in any order in which such plurality of scheduled assays are presented into the automated analytical system of the present invention. The term "simultaneous", as used herein, refers to the ability of the automated analytical system of the present invention to independently perform two or more scheduled assays at the same time. The term "kitting", as used herein, refers to the ability of the automated analytical system of the present invention to create a unit dose disposable by separately transferring test samples and reagents to a reaction vessel of the present invention without initiation of an assay reaction sequence. The term " quat" refers to a polycationic material solution for assays which use these materials which are not an antibody or antigen to capture the analyte from the sample on the matrix of, for example, MEIA cartridge. In the present inventive system, quat is dispensed to the matrix during test processing, prior to the transfer of the reaction mixture from the reaction vessel. DETECTION SYSTEMS The automated analytical system of the present invention is capable of performing various assays employing various detection systems known in the art and include, but are not intended to be limited to, speσtrophotometric absorbance assay such as end-point reaction analysis and rate of reaction analysis, turbidimetric assays, nephelometric assays, radiative energy attenuation assays (such as those described in U.S. Patent No. 4, 496, 293 and U. S. Patent No. 4,743,561 and incorporated herein by reference), ion capture assays, calorimetric assays, fluorometric assays, electrochemical detection systems, potentiometric detection systems, amperometric detection systems, and immunoassays. Immunoassays include, but are not intended to be limited to, heterogeneous immunoassays such as competitive immunoassays, sandwich immunoassays, immμnometric immunoassays, and the like, where the amount of a detectable moiety employed therein can be measured and correlated to the amount of analyte present in a test sample. Generally, in a spectrophotometric assay, such as those performed on the Abbott Spectrum clinical analyzer and the Abbott Spectrum Series II clinical analyzer (Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, I , USA) the interaction in an assay solution between the analyte to be determined and a reagent system specific for the analyte produces a detectable change in the transmittive properties of the assay solution. The change in the transmittive properties refers to the amount of light absorbed or scattered by an assay solution within a particular wavelength band when a beam of light of known intensity is passed through the assay solution. The change in the transmittive properties of an assay solution is measured by passing monochromiσ light having a known intensity though the assay solution and determining the ratio of the intensity of the transmitted or scattered light to the intensity of the incident light. Nearly all analytes either absorb energy of a specific wavelength or interact in an assay solution with a particular reagent system to produce a detectable change in the transmittive properties of the assay solution, characteristics which have resulted in the development of numerous specific spectrophotometric assays. Spectrophotometric assays which rely upon the measurement of the change in the transmittive properties of an assay solution as a measure of an analyte in the assay solution include, for example, assays wherein there is a change in the color of the assay when there is a change in the turbidity of the assay solution, that is, turbidi etric or nephelometric assays. In a calorimetric assay, the change in the transmittive properties of an assay solution is generally referred to as the absorbance of the assay solution and is dependent upon the change in the color of the assay solution due to the interaction of the analyte to be determined and reagent system specific for the analyte. The absorbance of the assay solution is related to the concentration of the analyte in the assay solution. A calorimetric assay utilizes a chromogenic reagent system capable of interacting in an assay solution with the particular analyte of interest, to produce a detectable change in the transmittive properties, specifically the color, of the assay solution. Numerous chromogenic reagent systems useful in the determination of specific analytes have been developed and are commercially available. The principle of turbidimetric assays is to determine the amount of light scattered or blocked by particulate matter as light passes though an assay solution. In a turbidimetric assay, the analyte of interest interacts with a reagent system specific for the analyte to form a suspension of particles in the assay solution. As a beam of light having a known intensity is passed through an assay solution, the suspension of particles formed by the interaction of the analyte reagent system blocks or scatters the incident light, thereby reducing the intensity of the light transmitted through the assay solution. The change of the transmittive properties in a turbidimetric assay refers to the decrease in the intensity of the light transmitted through an assay solution, is related to the amount of incident light that is scattered or blocked by the suspension of particles, and depends upon the number of particles present and the cross-sectional area of such particles. A nephelometric assay is similar to a turbidimetric assay in that the analyte of interest interacts with a reagent system specific for the ligand to form a suspension of particles in the assay solution. In a nephelometric assay, the change in the transmittive properties of the assay solution is also related to the amount of incident light scattered or blocked by the suspension of particles, but unlike a turbidimetric assay wherein the intensity of the light transmitted through the assay solution is measured, the scattered or -blocked light is measured at an angle to the light incident to the assay solution. Therefore, in a nephelometric assay the change in the transmittive properties refers to the difference in intensities of light incident to the assay solution and light scattered at an angle to the incident light. Turbidimetric and nephelometric assays are utilized in the analysis of blood, urine, spinal fluid, and the like, for the determination of analytes such as proteins wherein there is no comparable calorimetric assay due to the lack of an effective chromogenic reagent system. Yoe and Klimman, Photoelectric Chemical Analvsis. Vol. II: Nephelometry, Wiley & Sons, Inc. , New York, 1929, describe various nephelometric assays, various reagents and reagent systems which can be employed for performing spectrophotometric assays on the automated analytical systems of the present invention include, but are not intended to be limited to, those for the simultaneous determination of glucose and urea, such as described in U. S. Patent No. 5,037,738 and incorporated herein by reference. The simultaneous determination of calcium and phosphorous; the simultaneous determination of cholesterol and triglycerides; determining isoenzymeε; determining blood ammonia levels, and the like, can be performed on the apparatus and by the methods of the present invention. Typically in a fluorometric assay, an analyte in an assay solution is chemically or immunologically transformed into a fluorescent complex or conjugate thereby producing a detectable change in the fluorescent properties of the assay solution. The change in the fluorescent properties of the assay solution is measured by exciting the fluorescent complex or conjugate properties produced with monochromatic light of a wavelength within the excitation wavelength band of the fluorescer, and measuring the intensity of the emitted light at a wavelength within the emission wavelength band of the fluoreεcer. The fluorescent intensity of the emitted light is related to the concentration of the analyte. However, the intensity of the fluorescence emitted by the assay solution may be inhibited when the ligand to be determined complexes with nonfluorescent interferences such as protein or phosphates present in the sample, or when the sample containing the ligand to be determined has sufficient color so as to act as a filter and thereby reduce the intensity of the emitted fluorescence. It is well recognized that in order to maximize the sensitivity and specificity of a fluorometric assay, these inhibiting factors, if present, must be overcome either by removal of the nonfluorescent interferences or color producing material prior to the analysis, or by compensating for the presence of such factors using an internal standard added to a second aliquot of sample and carrying out the entire assay procedure using the aliquot containing the internal standard. ASSAY FORMATS Generally, homogeneous and heterogeneous immunoassays depend upon the ability of a first binding member of a binding member pair to specifically bind to a second binding member of a binding member pair wherein a conjugate, comprising one of such binding members labeled with a detectable moiety, is employed to determine the extent of such binding. For example, where such binding pair members are an analyte and an antibody to such analyte, the extent of binding is determined by the amount of the detectable moiety present in the conjugate, which either has or has not participated in a binding reaction with the analyte, wherein the amount of the detectable moiety detected and measured can be correlated to the amount of analyte present in the test sample. Homogeneous immunoassays typically are performed in a competitive immunoassay format involving a competition between an analyte from a test sample and a tracer for a limited number of receptor binding sites on an antibody to the analyte. The tracer comprises the analyte or analog thereof labeled with a detectable moiety wherein the concentration of analyte in the test sample determines the amount of the tracer that will specifically bind to the antibody. The amount of the tracer-antibody conjugate produced by such binding may be quantitatively measured and is inversely proportional to the amount of analyte present in the test sample. For example, fluorescent polarization techniques for making such determination, such as in fluorescent polarization immunoassays as described herein, are based on the principle that a fluorescently labeled compound when excited by linearly polarized light will emit fluorescence having a degree of polarization inversely related to its rate of rotation. When a molecule such as a tracer-antibody conjugate having a fluorescent label is excited with a linearly polarized fluorescent molecule it is constrained from rotating between the time light is absorbed and emitted. When a "free" tracer molecule (i.e., unbound to an antibody) is excited by linearly polarized light, its rotation is much faster than the corresponding tracer-antibody conjugate and the molecules are more randomly orientated, therefore, the emitted light is polarized. Accordingly, when plane polarized light is passed through a solution containing the aforementioned reagents, a fluorescent polarization response is detected and correlated to the amount of analyte present in the test sample. Various fluorescent compounds which can be employed for performing fluorescent polarization asεayε on the automated analytical system of the present invention include, but are not intended to be limited to, ami ofluoresceins, such as described in U. S. Patent No. 4,510,251 and U.S. Patent No. 4,614,823, incorporated herein by reference; triazinylaminofluoresceinε, εuch as described in U. S. Patent No. 4,420,568 and U.S. Patent No. 4,593,089, incorporated herein by reference; carboxyfluoresceinε, εuch aε deεcribed in U. S. Patent No. 4, 668, 640, incorporated herein by reference; and the like. Heterogenouε immunoassays typically involve a labeled reagent or tracer comprising an analyte, an analog of the analyte, or an antibody thereto, labeled with a detectable moiety, to form a free species and a bound species. In order to correlate the amount of tracer in one of such species to the amount of ' analyte present in the test sample, the free species must first be separated from the bound species, which can be accomplished according to methods known in the art employing solid phase materials for the direct immobilization of one of the binding participants in the binding reaction, such as the antibody, analyte or analog of the analyte, wherein one of the binding participants is immobilized on a solid phase material, such as a test tube, beads, particles, microparticles or the matrix of a fibrous material, and the like, according to methods known in the art. Heterogenous immunoassays can be performed in a competitive immunoassay format aε described above wherein, for example, the antibody can be immobilized to a solid phase material whereby upon separation, the amount of the tracer which is bound to such solid phase material can be detected and correlated to the amount of analyte present in the test sample. Another form of a heterogeneous immunoassay employing a solid phase material is referred to as a sandwich immunoassay, which involves contacting a test εample containing, for example, an antigen with a protein such aε an antibody or another substance capable of binding the antigen, and which is immobilized on a solid phase material. The solid phase material typically is treated with a second antigen or antibody which has been labeled with a detectable moiety. The second antigen or antibody then becomes bound to the corresponding antigen or antibody on the solid phase material and, following one or more washing steps to remove any unbound material, an indicator material such as a chromogenic substance which reacts with the detectable moiety (e. g. , where the detectable moiety is an enzyme,- a substrate for such enzyme is added) to produce a color change. The color change is then detected and correlated to the amount of antigen or antibody present in the test sample. For example, a heterogeneous immunoassay which can be performed by the automated analytical system of the present invention, in either a competitive or sandwich immunoassay format, is a microparticle capture enzyme immunoassay, such aε that deεcribed in Clinical Che istry. Volume 34, No. 9, pages 1726-1732 (1988), employing microparticles as the solid phase material. In addition, the use of sucrose in microparticle diluent has been found to achieve neutral density of the microparticles. The methodology entails the determination of the optimum sucrose concentration which will eliminate the settling of microparticles. The sucrose concentration required to achieve neutral density is assay specific and microparticle lot specific. The principal involves dissolving sucrose in solution to increase the density of the diluent. When the density of the diluent and microparticles are equivalent, the microparticles will be in a suspended state. Density neutralization can also be achieved by using other materials such as metrizamide and/or metrizoic acid. Separation of the bound and free species is accomplished by capture of the microparticles on a glaεε fiber matrix of a εimple cartridge (herein, the "MEIA cartridge"), a process that relies on the high affinity of glass fibers for the microparticles, wherein the microparticles adhere to the surface of the fibers irreversibly, and nonspecifically bound material can be effectively removed by waεhing the matrix. The matrix alεo provideε a precisely located mechanical support for the microparticles during the optical quantification phase of the assay protocol aε described herein. When performing a sandwich immunoasεay, microparticles coated with antibody to the analyte in the test sample are incubated with the test sample containing the analyte of interest to form a capture complex with the analyte from the test sample. A conjugate comprising antibody to the analyte labeled with a detectable moiety, preferably an enzyme / is then incubated with the capture complex to form the second of a sandwich complex. When performing a competitive immunoassay, microparticles coated with antibody to the analyte in the test sample are incubated with the test sample containing the analyte of interest and a conjugate comprising the analyte or analog thereof labeled with a detectable moiety, preferably an enzyme. Removal of unbound conjugate is accomplished with the glass fiber matrix of the MEIA cartridge and, where the detectable moiety is an enzyme, a substrate for the enzyme capable of providing a detectable signal is added and the signal provided thereby is measured and correlated to the amount of analyte present in the test sample. Preferably, the enzyme-substrate system employed by the competitive and sandwich MEIA formats is alkaline phosphataεe and 4-methylumbelliferyl phoεphate (MUP), although other enzyme-subεtrate systemε known in the art can be employed as well. The MEIA cartridge which is employed by the automated analytical system of the present invention compriseε a reaction well for retaining and immobilizing microparticle-analyte complexeε. The reaction well has an entrance port and means for holding a quantity of sample and asεay reaction mixtureε poεitioned over a fibrous matrix which retains and immobilizes microparticle-analyte complexes as described above. The fibrous matrix is composed of fibers having an average spatial separation greater than the average diameter of the microparticles. Preferably, the average fiber spatial separation is greater than 10 microns. The reaction well further compriεeε an absorbent material positioned below the fibrous matrix to enhance the flow of sample and assay reaction mixtures through the fibrous matrix. Preferably, the absorbent material is a fibrous material whose fibers predominantly lie in a plane perpendicular to the lower surface of the fibrous matrix. The absorbent material is in fluid communication with the fibrous matrix. Generally, the absorbent material is in physical contact with the lower surface of the fibrous matrix. The interior of the reaction well, therefore, is generally sized or σontains positioning means to maintain the fluid communication between the absorbent material and the fibrous matrix. Preferably, a spike located at the bottom of the reaction well can be used to force the absorbent material into contact with the lower surface of the fibrous matrix. Additionally, it is preferable to vent to the atmosphere the gases displaced in the absorbent material by the liquids absorbed therein during the performance of an immunoassay. According to the immunoassay methodologies described above, standard solutions of the analyte of known concentrations covering the clinical concentration range are typically prepared and asεayed aε iε the test sample to be assayed. This blank assay provides a serieε of signal measurements corresponding to the known concentrations from which a standard curve is drawn. The optical signal corresponding to the unknown εample iε correlated in a concentration value through interpretation from the blank or εtandard curve. ANALYTICAL SYSTEM METHOD Automated analytical methodology for effecting analysis of a plurality of test samples according to the present invention is achieved by introducing reagent packs, test εample container and reaction vessels onto concentric carousels of a main carousel. The test εample container can be a test tube, cuvette, vacutainer tube, and the like, for holding a test sample. The reagent packs and test εample containers are identified and aligned respectively with a reaction vessel for transfer and kitting of the reaction vessel by transfer of test sample and specific reagents from the reagent pack for preparation of a predetermined test. The reaction vessel containing the test sample and one or more reagents is transferred to a process carousel wherein controlled environment conditions exist for incubation once the sample has been appropriately mixed with various -reagents to form a reaction mixture. When all aεsay proσesεing εteps have been completed, the reaction mixture is identified and transferred to at least, for example, one of a fluorescent polarization immunoassay reader or a microparticle enzyme immunoassay cartridge positioned on a separate cartridge wheel or carousel for further preparation before reading. The processed test samples are read and the readings are calculated with the resulting data being recorded and/or printed. The methodology of the automated immunoassay analytical system is achieved through the use of a self-contained, fully automated, continuous and random access instrument comprising a main carousel assembly consisting of the reagent pack carousel, a reaction vessel carousel and a test sample container carousel concentrically and independently rotatable. The main carousel assembly iε provided with a tranεfer pipette operated by a boom arm for transferring and kitting test sample and reagents into the reaction vessel automatically following a predetermined test schedule. The main carousel assembly is provided with bar code readers for reagent packs and test sample containers and has the capability of aligning the reagent pack carousel and test sample container carousel and a reaction vesεel for pipette tranεfer operations. Once the assay to be performed is scheduled, the reaction vessel carousel, the reagent pack carousel and the test sample container carousel are rotated until the reaction vessel, a reagent pack and a test sample container, respectively, are determined to be in the transfer pipette access position. The transfer pipette then transferε the teεt sample from the test sample container and, depending upon the assay to be performed, the reagents from the reagent pack are transferred to the reaction vessel. The reaction vessel carousel is then rotated to a transfer station position which contacts the reaction vessel with a transfer mechanism and pulls the reaction vesεel into the transfer station. The reaction vessel is then loaded onto the proceεε carousel by the transfer mechanism. When performing a fluorescent polarization immunoassay (FPIA) with the automated analytical system of the present invention aε deεcribed in more detail below, various pipetting activities are performed by a second transfer pipette apparatus which is in service for the process carousel, and the process carousel iε rotated so that the reaction vessel, when properly pipetted with, for example, FPIA reagents, is at the read station of the FPIA processing stations' and the FPIA determination on reading, is made on the reaction vessel. The process carousel iε then rotated so that the read reaction*- veεsel is at the transfer station. The reaction vessel is again contacted and transferred by the transfer station. The transfer station is rotated and pushes the reaction vessel into a release container opening. For a microparticle enzyme immunoasεay (MEIA) performed with the automated analytical syεtem of the present invention as described in more detail below, after the various pipetting activities for the MEIA, which can be completed at the main carousel assembly, the reaction vessel is transferred to the process carousel aε described in the FPIA process. Pipetting can also be accomplished in the process carousel or jointly between the two carouselε. To complete the MEIA, the reaction mixture iε transferred from the reaction vesεel to a matrix of an MEIA cartridge on a cartridge carousel with the second trans fer pipette. The matrix iε washed with a buffer and a subεtrate, εuch aε MUP (defined earlier) , or other εuitable εubstrate known in the art. The cartridge carous el is then rotated so that the MEIA cartridge is positioned at an MEIA processing assembly and the MEIA determination is made. The MEIA reaction vesε el is ej ected into the waste container aε des cribed- for the FPIA reaction vessel. The MEIA cartridge is independently ej ected from the cartridge wheel by an ej ector at an appropriate ej ector station into a waste container. Preferably, two diεtinσt analytical technologies as des cribed above, FPIA and MEIA, are incorporated into the automated analytical system of the pres ent invention; however, more than two distinct analytical technologies can be incorporated into the inventive system. These methods are complimentary and share a commonality of apparatus and procedural stepε , with the FPIA generally being the method of choice for analyteε of low molecular weight and MEIA for moleculeε such as protein hormones, antibodies or analytes of low molecular weight requiring higher senεitivity. The two technologieε εhare system components including the operator control panel, pipetting boom assemblieε , fluidicε εystems, air and liquid reagent heaterε, printerε, bar code reader and εtepper motors. Such commonality of use of system components allows for a compact instrument deεpite the dual FPIA and MEIA capability. The FPIA optic εyεtems (such as described in U. S. Patent No. 4,269,511 and incorporated herein by reference) can utilize a polarizing filter which is an electrically switched liquid crystal, maintaining a compact size and avoiding complex and potentially unreliable moving parts. When performing FPIA asεayε utilizing the automated analytical system of the present invention, the FPIA reagent packs will typically include a tracer comprising the analyte or analog thereof, coupled to a detectable moiety, an antibody specific to that analyte, and a specimen pretreatment reagent. In a preferred FPIA format, the analyte being determined competes with the tracer for a limited number of binding εiteε on the antibodies specific to the portion or portions of the analyte and tracer. The detectable moiety component of the tracer is preferably a fluorescent moiety selected from the group consisting of fluoresceinε, aminofluoresceins, carboxyfluoresceinε, fluoreεceinamineε, and the like, more preferably carboxymethyl-aminomethyl-fluoreεcein, carboxyethylamino ethyl-σarboxyfluoreεcein, 6- σarboxyfluoreεcein, 5-σarboxyfluorescein, succinylanimomethyl-fluoreεcein, thiourea- aminofluorescein, methoxytrianolylaminofluorescein, aminofluorescein, and the like. In another embodiment, the FPIA format utilizes a unique, round, plastic, reaction cuvette suitable for fluorescence polarization and absorbance asεay technologies which require no orientation other than top-to-bottom. This plaεtic reaction cuvette has physical characteristics of low birefringence throughout the optical read region as well as stringent dimensional tolerances which allow reproducible absorbance readings. Bifringence is defined as the degree of retardation of the extraordinary ray as it passes through a material. The greater the degree of retardation, the greater will be the level of birefringence. Retardation of the extra-ordinary ray is dependent on the magnitude and direction of the induced stress. Therefore, passing a ray of linearly polarized light through a material with induced stress will result in depolarization of the ray. In order for a cuvette to be utilized for fluorescence polarization measurements, it iε important that the cuvette be prepared under conditions which yield minimum stress. The geometry of the cuvette' has been designed to utilize the inherent fluidics of automated medical diagnostic instrumentation to minimize the hydrophobic effect of plastic. MEIA results can be determined by quantifying the rate of fluorescence developed when fluorogenic substrate is converted by the action of an enzyme labeled conjugate. For example, when performing either a competitive MEIA or sandwich MEIA, the specifically bound alkaline phosphataεe on the microparticles iε detected by addition of the fluorogenic substrate MUP to the matrix. The alkaline phosphatase catalyzes hydrolysis of the MUP to inorganic phosphate and fluorescent 4-methylumbelliferone (4-MU). The liberated 4-mu is detected by the MEIA optics assembly front surface fluorometer which is designed to detect fluorescence of low concentrations of 4-MU without interference by fluorescence of 4-MUP at a wavelength of 367. A syεtem of lenεeε and optical filters focus filtered light (wavelength = 365) from a mercury arc lamp on to the surface of the matrix and focus emitted fluorescence from 4-MU (wavelength = 448) on to a photo multiplier tube. Li.ke the FPIA optics assembly, the MEIA optics syεtem is compact and has no moving parts. About five percent of the excitation light is detected by a photodiode, allowing normalization of the fluorescence data and generation of a control signal used by the lamp power supply to maintain the intensity of the excitation light within five percent over the useful life of the lamp. The MEIA post-proceεεor uεeε linear regreεεion analyεiε to convert the data from multiple εuccesεive determinationε of 4-MU fluorescence to a rate which is proportional to the concentration of alkaline phosphataεe conjugate specifically bound to the microparticles. MEIA formats can be run with a ulti-position MEIA auxiliary carousel and proσesε carousel as well as a MEIA reagent pack containing microparticle reagent, an alkaline phosphatase conjugate and, in some cases, a dilute buffer specific for the asεay being performed. Because the microparticles tend not to settle out of suεpenεion during the course of the assay, they can readily be pipetted. The effective surface area of polystyrene latex microparticles is several fold greater than that of a large diameter polyεtyrene bead (e.g., one quarter inch beads) commonly uεed in commercial immunoassays. Because of this large εurface area and the very small diffusion distance between analyte and the capture molecules on the surface of the microparticles, the capture phase employed in many of the MEIA methods being performed reaches equilibrium within several minutes, allowing for a full carousel of test samples to be completed in a very short time frame. Unlike an FPIA, the heterogeneous immunoasεayε, εuch aε a MEIA, require a separation step aε deεcribed above. In particular, after incubation of the microparticles with a test sample, the microparticles are separated from the reaction mixture by transfer to the matrix contained in the MEIA cartridge aε deεcribed above. The matrix provides a precisely located mechanical support for the microparticles during the subsequent optical read phase-of the assa ' y. Thiε preciεely located mechanical support, i. e. the cartridge, is fit into the auxiliary carousel at a predetermined spacing from the reader apparatus by camming means. ANALYTICAL SYSTEM APPARATUS The automated immunoassay analytical syεtem according to the present invention (hereinafter the "analytical syεtem" or "system") is both continuous and random acceεε. The following description of the analytical system includes a general description of sufficient scope for those skilled in the relevant arts,, followed by more detailed desσriptionε of critical components and subεystems unique to the syεtem. The drawingε do not illustrate all of the mechanical and electrical elementε for driving and controlling the various components of the system, because the structure and operation of such omitted elementε are known to those of ordinary skill in the art who having knowledge of the information provided herein would understand the operation of the system and the various components and related processeε utilized for treating samples and determining analytical results. Referring to the drawings, FIGS. 1 and 2 present isometric views of the apparatus for the automatic immunoassay analytical system of the present invention. The syεtem apparatuε as it appears in FIG. 1 presents the system apparatus as used by the technician, with FIG. 2 illustrating an isometric view of the frame and cabinetry with component parts removed. The system apparatus of the present invention is identified generally as 2 in FIG. 1. The system apparatus 2 has an exposed front end carousel 4 which is serviced by a first transfer pipette mechanism 6 for kitting scheduled tests along with sampleε into a reaction vesεel. The system provides a computer screen 8 and computer keyboard 10 along with access panels 12 for accessing storage and waste compartments. The system apparatus 2 is provided with rollers 14 for movement of the system apparatus within a laboratory complex as required. The freedom of movement of the system apparatus through rollers 14 is allowed since the system is fully self-contained but for power requirements. Referring to FIG. 2, the εyεtem apparatus 2 cabinet frame 16 is illustrated with substantially all functioning components of the syεtem apparatuε removed. A controlled environment zone 18 iε a cloεed unit during operation with light shielding and rigid control of airflow as well as temperature as opposed to the open front end carousel 4. The front end carousel 4 communicates with the controlled environment zone 18 through a transfer port 20. The front end carousel 4 is mounted to an aluminum base plate which rests on a support platform 22 and the first transfer pipette mechanism is mounted on means 24. Referring to FIG. 3, the top plan view of the εyεtem apparatuε 2 εhowε a portion of the cabinet frame 16 and the front end carousel 4 in partial phantom. This portion of the cabinet 16 also supports a power supply 192, a supply bottle 196, a solid waste container 198, and a liquid waste container 200. The supply bottle 196 provides buffers for the testε being performed, while the containers 198 and 200 provide storage for the processed waste material. Referring to FIGS. 4A and 4B, components of the system apparatuε are shown in more detail with relative positioning to further illustrate the procesε flow of the system apparatus. For example, εample cupε 26 are mounted on a εample cup carouεel 28 which is concentrically fitted within the front end carouεel 4 along with reagent pack carouεel 32 and reaction vesεel carousel 36. The reagent pack carousel 32 is concentrically fitted between the sample cup carousel 28 and the reaction vessel carousel 36. The reagent pack carousel carries reagent packs 30 and the reaction vessel carousel 36 carries reaction vessels 34. The front end carousel 4 inclusive of the three front end carouselε, the εample cup carousel 28, reagent pack carousel 32 and -reaction vessel carousel 36 can by example contain the following capacities. The sample cup carousel 28 can hold 60 blood collection tubes, such as Vacutainer® blood collection tubes, or 90 sample cups which are injection molded as one piece and can be provided with standalone base mounts. Standalone base mounts are suitable for technician handling and pipetting of samples into the sample cups. The reagent pack carousel 32^provides for 20 different reagent paσkε 30. The reaction veεεel carousel 36 provides 90 reaction vessels 34. The front end carousel 4 has an operable bar code reader 38 for automatically identifying reagent pack carousel 32 and εample carousel 28. A wash cup 40 iε provided for the first transfer pipette mechanism 6 for waεhing aε required between tranεfer of variouε εample and reagentε. The first transfer pipette mechanism 6 is utilized in kitting the various reagent pack liquid materials and sample into a reaction vesεel 34.- The reagentε and the sample are properly kitted through means of the first transfer pipette mechanism 6 inclusive of pump means. The various carouselε are rotated and aligned for kitting at the pipetting εtation. The kitted reaction veεsel 34 is positioned by reaction vessel carousel 36 into the proper position for transfer to the transfer station 42. The reaction vesεel 34 is transferred to the transfer station 42 through transfer means described below in more detail below (FIG. 9) wherein the transfer station 42 is then rotated to move the reaction vessel onto process carousel 46. As shown, the procesε carousel 46 is driven by a stepper motor 48 and iε εerviced by a second transfer pipette mechanism 50. The process carousel 46 supported by three wheels for height control and control of any radial movement caused by irregularly shaped carousel elements. Both the FPIA and MEIA procedures utilize the system apparatus commonly up through and including the procesε carouεel 46. The proceεε carouεel 46 includes FPIA processing 52 and FPIA processing lamp 54 for direct reading of FPIA analyεiε of kitted, pipetted and properly reacted reagentε εample from the reaction veεεel 34. The process carousel 46 holds, for example, 36 reaction vessels 34 and has a carousel diameter of about 12.5 inches. The procesε carouεel 46 moves the reaction vesεel 34 between the transfer station 42, the second transfer pipettor mechanism 50, the point of pipetting, and the FPIA reader processing 52. The controlled environment ■ zone 18, which includes the 'transfer station 42 and process carouεel 46, provides FPIA processing with air circulation under temperature control by cabinet air circulation fan 56. A wash cup 58 for the second transfer pipette mechanism 50 is provided. The second transfer pipette 50 is utilized for adding reagents (pipetting) under conditions of incubation and timing to the sample in the FPIA test schedule reaction vessel 34 for FPIA processing. MEIA processing can also utilize the second tranεfer pipette 50 for adding reagents to the sample before the reaction mix is added to MEIA cartridgeε 68 which are mounted on the auxiliary carouεel 64, alεo referred to aε the cartridge wheel carousel. The MEIA reagent mixed εample is transferred to the MEIA cartridge 68 by the second transfer pipette 50. The second tranεfer pipette 50 moves the pipette probe between the wells in the reaction vesεel 34 on the procesε carouεel 46 to the MEIA cartridge 68 on the auxiliary carouεel 64 and to the waεh cup 58. A rack- and-pinion drive through two axis stepper motor drives achieves preciεion drive on both the R and Z axiε. Travel, for example, on the Z axiε can be about 3 incheε and on the R axiε about 4.5 to 5.0 incheε. The auxiliary carouεel 64 holds, for example, 32 MEIA cartridges 68 and has a diameter of about 9.5 inches. The auxiliary carousel 64 moves the MEIA cartridges 68 between various stations including the second transfer pipettor mechanism pipette point, the MUP dispense station 72, the MEIA washstation 70 and the MEIA reader 74 and the MEIA cartridge ejection point 62. The auxiliary carouεel 64 iε εtepper motor driven and iε carried by three wheels with one wheel located at the Z axis height control at the cartridge insertion point, the second wheel at the pipette point, and the third wheel at the MEIA reader in order to maintain the auxiliary carousel 64 within desired geometric relationshipε to theεe variouε functionε. MEIA cartridgeε 68 are loaded into a cartridge hopper 590 which feedε the MEIA cartridges 68 into the auxiliary carousel 64. The automatic feeding of the MEIA cartridges 68 iε provided with a proper height adjustment of the cartridge 68 into the auxiliary carousel 64 aε required by MEIA reading. The cartridge hopper 590 feeds individual cartridges 68 to the auxiliary carouεel 64 and changes the axis of orientation of the cartridge 68 from horizontal to vertical by automatic means. Removal of the MEIA cartridges 68 is achieved through the use of an ejector 62 which operates through an ejection rod and forces the MEIA cartridge 68 from the auxiliary carousel 64 which is dropped into the solid waste container 200 (FIG. 3). The auxiliary carousel 64 is' further serviced by a MEIA buffer heater and dispenser 70, MUP heater and dispenser probe 72, and MEIA reader 74. The MEIA cartridgeε .68 are removed from the auxiliary carousel 64 by a cartridge ejector 62 after the MEIA read has been completed. FIG. 5 provides a top view in isolation and partial section of elements of the drive and guide systems of the main ..carousel 4 with the various carousels removed. In FIG. 5 a sample cup carousel stepper motor 76 is εhown mounted with mounting εpring 78. The reagent pack carouεel motor 80 iε alεo shown with a mounting spring 82. .The reaction vessel carousel motor 84 and mounting spring 86 are positioned to the exterior of the two inner carousels, i. e. the sample cups carousel 28 and the reagent pack carousel 32. Roller guides 88 are provided for the sample cup carousel 28 and a tensioning εpring 90. The reagent pack carousel is provided with roller guideε 92 and tensioning means 94. The reaction vessel roller guides 96 are also provided with εpring elements 98, the purposes of the guide and theεe variouε spring elements being to maintain very finite tracking of the concentric carouselε when motivated by the individual stepper motors. Motion control for the system 2 is performed by 22 stepper motors of various sizes, some of which are identified herein. The specificationε and operation of the stepper motors are described generally as follows, such description being sufficient for one skilled in the art. All the stepper motors are permanent magnet motors with 200 full stepε per shaft revolution which is equivalent to 1.8 degrees revolution per step. A single stepping motor control syεtem compriεes the following: (1) A step motor connected to a mechanism to move the mechanism as required. (2) A driver which applies voltages to the step motor causing i.t to move in reεponεe to 3 control εignalε from control electronicε, i.e., an "Indexer". (3) An Indexer which compriεes electronics for controlling the motor by the driver. It determines move profiles, which include direction of rotation, number of steps to move and acceleration and velocity parameters. (4) A home sensor is used for each step motor. The home sensor is used as a position reference by the Indexer and can also be used by the Indexer to check for errors. (5) Encoders are used by the rotary devices, the carousels and transfer mechanism to verify correct movement. At the end of a move, the encoder count is checked to validate that the motor moved to the correct position. The system microprocessor (CPU) is used to determine the distance, velocity and acceleration of a motor movement of the steppers. It transferε the information to the Indexer which then controls the movement. At the end of the movement, the Indexer then signals the system microprocesεor (CPU) that the movement is complete. The εyεtem microproceεεor (CPU) then checkε the encoders to validate the movement if a rotary mechanism was being moved and checks the Indexer to verify it had detected no errors. There are three indexer boards in each system 2. Each board is identical and can control up to eight stepper motors. Each board utilizeε one εlave microproσeεεor to provide the eight indexer functionε on each board. Such a combination of functions is referred to aε an "8-axiε" indexer. Two of the indexer axes are not uεed. The indexer boards communicate to the εyεtem miσroproceεsor (CPU) over a backplane VME bus. The Indexers have addresseε that are modified by jumperε before inεtallation into the εyεtem. This is the mechanism that allows otherwise identical boards to reside in the same syεtem backplane VME bus. Each board is connected via the VME backplane bus to one cable per board that carries the indexer signalε to the driverε. The Indexer provideε a variety of movement profiles. Many of the step motor movements require that the speed of the motor be increased in a controlled fashion until the final velocity is reached. At some point in the movement, the speed must then be decreased in a controlled fashion. This process is called a "velocity profile" and can be done linearly, sinusoidally, or parabolically. The type of velocity profile executed iε determined by the syεtem microproceεsor (CPU). The Indexers are available from vendors as "off the εhelf" 8-axiε indexers. There are three PC boardε uεed to provide the 22 separate motor drive circuits. Two of the boards are identical and referred to as the "Stepper Drive" boards. Each of the Stepper Drive boards compriεes eight functionally identical εtepper driver cirσuitε. They differ only in the current levelε applied to each εtepper motor. The current iε controlled by a εeparate resistor in each driver circuit. The third board is called a "Power I/O" board because it contains seven motor driver circuits and eight solenoid driver circuits. A single driver receives the following three inputs from an Indexer which controls its outputs to the step motor: (1) Step input - for each step pulse input, the step motor will be moved one step, (2) Direction input - constant level signal which controls the direction of motor rotation, (3) Power Hi input - logic level input which causeε the driver to apply maximum power to the εtep motor during movement. When Power Hi iε not aεεerted, a lower power level is applied to the step motor to reduce heat and to reduce syεtem power conεumption when the motor iε not being moved. Each driver circuit haε a pair of current εetting reεiεtorε to set' motor current level for Power High and to set a different motor current level when Power High is not asεerted. There are two pairε of current εetting reεiεtorε for each driver circuit. Additionally, each board haε logic uεed to identify the poεition of the board in the card cage. There are two pinε in the power backplane connectorε which are uεed to encode each connector εlot for the three boards that drive motors. By grounding or leaving unconnected, four combinations of two pins are posεible. The board logic decodeε the connector position and, through FET switcheε, each driver circuit than connects the correct pair of current setting resistors. The board output is only enabled if the Stepper Drive is plugged "into one of the two connectors allocated for Stepper Drive boards. Each stepper drive circuit iε known in the industry and avail-able from most circuit vendors. The circuit is known as a "Bipolar chopper half-step driver". Although there are 200 "full steps" per shaft revolution, the motor can be driven in such a way as to cause the εhaft to εtop midway between the "full εtep" position. It can of course also stop at the "full step" positionε, which provideε a total of 400 steps per εhaft revolution. This adds to the resolution of the moving mechanism and aids in reducing motor induced vibration. The Power I/O board includeε the εeven εtepper drive circuitε and eight εolenoid driverε aε indicated above. Six of the εtepper driver circuitε are identical in function to those of the Stepper Drive boards. The seventh is functionally the same except that it is provided with less heat sink and therefore is limited to driving lower power motors. This circuit iε uεed to drive the small ejector 62. There iε only one pair of current εetting reεiεtorε per driver circuit εince there iε only one Power I/O per system. Position decoding logic on the Power I/O enables outputs only when it is plugged into the connector designated for the Power I/O board. The Home Sensorε are fed into the Indexers and the Encoder circuits are fed into a VME general purpose board which provides counters for counting the encoder pulseε and which alεo makeε the counters available to the system microprocesεor (CPU). At the beginning of a move, the εyεtem microproceεεor (CPU) εets the appropriate encoder counter to zero. It then commands an Indexer to move the corresponding stepper motor the required number of stepε. At the end of the move the system microprocessor (CPU) checks the encoder counter to verify that the motor did move the correct number of εtepε. There iε a "window" of acceptability, εuch that the counter can be off by a few countε. If the counter iε off by more than the permissible number of counts, an error is declared by the syεtem microprocessor (CPU) and appropriate action is then taken by the system microproceεεor (CPU). The Power I/O board provides "chopper dri-ves" to control variouε εolenoid valveε in the εyεtem. The εyεtem microproceεεor (CPU) sets a bit of one of the digital I/O boards to energize a valve. The bit is optically coupled to the Power I/O solenoid drive circuit. The solenoid drive circuit then provides a 36V turn on voltage for approximately 300msec, after which the voltage is lowered to about 27 volts to reduce power disεipation and εolenoid temperature riεe. The lower voltage iε achieved by applying the 36V in a chopped faεhion εuch that the time average is about 27 volts, although the actual waveform is comprised only of 36V and ground signal levels. This is also known as pulse width modulation. Referring to FIG. 6, the process carousel 46 is shown in an isolational crosε-sectional side view. One reaction vesεel 34 iε at reεt or nonoperative poεition and a εecond reaction veεεel 34 iε in poεition for FPIA read. The proceεs carouεel 46 iε capable of bidirectional motion for timely movement of the variouε reaction vessels 34 to pipettor action, read, or transfer to and from the carousel. Up to about 36 or more reaction veεεelε 34 can be proceεεed at one time on the proceεε carousel 46 depending on diameter and sizing of the reaction vesselε 34. Referring now to FIG. 7, the firεt transfer pipette mechanism 6 shown in more detail includes a transfer pipette Z axis motor 102 which moves the probe arm 104, probe 106 and probe tip 108 in a vertical direction while transfer pipette R axis motor 100 drives the probe arm 104, probe adjustment means 106 and probe tip 108 in a horizontal motion. The first tranεfer pipette mechanism 6, sometimes labeled "Sample Probe Arm Mechanism" , moves the probe between the sample cup 26, the reagent pack 30, the reaction vessel 34 and the wash cup 40. The wash cup 40 is used to wash the interior* and exterior surfaces of the first transfer pipettor mechanism 6 probe. The drive of the first transfer pipette mechanism is a rack-and-pinion drive meanε along the Z and R axiε by two-εtepper motor driverε. A brake is provided to hold the Z axis position when power is lost, thus avoiding damage to the εyεtem apparatuε. For example, the firεt tranεfer pipette echaniεm can be designed to have a Z axiε travel. of about 3 incheε and an R axiε travel of about 11-1/2 incheε. The first tranεfer pipette mechanism 6 and the second transfer pipette mechanism 50 are closely related in general syεtem apparatuε function and deεign, with variation on travel and size being the only substantial differences. Both units have a probe arm circuit 110 as illustrated by the schematic side view of FIG. 8. The schematic illustrateε the R axis motor 100 and the Z axiε motor 102 in relationship to an upper PCB 112 and a R axis home εensor 114. A lower PCB 116 is illustrated in relationship to the Z axis home senεor 118 with a coil cable 120 connecting the variouε elementε. The tranεfer station 42 plays a key role in apparatus and process function. Referring to FIGS. 9A and 9B, the transfer element at the transfer station 42 is shown engaging reaction vesεel 34 by means of a reaction vessel transfer projection 172. The transfer arm 173 is projected out between reaction vessel elements of the reaction vessel carousel 36 and, by rotation of the transfer station 42, engages the reaction vessel transfer projection 172. By means of a transfer arm drive gear 174, the transfer arm 173 rack gear 176 moves the transfer arm 173 out and in relationship to the transfer station 42. The transfer station 42 has a rotation axis 178. A reaction vessel 34' , shown in phantom, is shown as mounted on the front end carousel 4, reaction vessel carousel 36 being engaged by the transfer arm 173 by means of reaction vesεel tranεfer projection 172. The reaction vessel 34' has a transfer handling means, i.e. transfer projection 172 which allows the transfer arm 173 of the transfer carousel to position an engagement means or pick 184 for engaging the reaction vesεel 34' transfer projection 172. The reaction vessel 34 is illustrated onboard the transfer station by reaction transfer station 42 which moves the reaction veεεel 34 between the front end carouεel 4 and the process carousel 46. The transfer station 42 moves the discarded reaction vesεel 34 from the process carousel 46 to the waste ejection station (not shown). The transfer station 42- is driven by a stepper motor drive and is- supported by precision linear ball bearings and axis of rotation ball bearings. SYSTEM SCHEDULER According to the present invention, the analytical system 2 iε controlled by εoftware executed by the εyεtem microprocessor (CPU) which also executes application software for generating and optimizing the tests being run on the analytical system 2 (hereinafter the "scheduler"). The scheduler scheduleε the aσtivitieε of aεεayε that have been modelled by uεing a flexible , protocol technology which enables the εcheduler to minimize the time during which the mechanical componentε of the analytical εyεtem 2, i. e. , the resources, remain idle by properly sequencing the activities which comprise the assay. These activities can be, for example, pipetting (P), optical or other types of readings (R), cartridge washings (W), -and MUP dispensing (D), all of which are accomplished using the εyεtem' s resources. The reεourceε according to preferred embodiment of the analytical εyεtem 2 include the primary carousel 46, the auxiliary carousel 64, and the process pipettor 50. Generally, an activity uses only one resource, i.e., a reading (R), washing (W), or dispensing (D) at one station of a carousel. However, the pipetting (P) uses more than one resource, i. e. , the pipettor 50 and one or both of the carousels 46, 64. The flexible protocol technology is of developmental software used by a chemist to model assays, such as the FPIA and MEIA assays, for execution by instrumentation software on the analytical system 2. When the chemist is modelling an assay, the flexible protocol inhibits any sequence of activities for the asεay that will not run on the εyεtem 2. Thus, the εyεtem 2 never sees a corrupt assay because the flexible protocol rules are already imbedded in the asεay protocol. The flexible protocol technology uεed to model an assay specifies (1) what activities are to be performed for a particular asεay and the order in which the activitieε are to be performed, (2) the incubation periods between the activities, (3) how the activities are to be performed and their time durations, and (4) the equilibration and evaporation constraints for each assay. With respect to the firεt specification of the flexible protocol, the activity protocol, FIGS. 10 and 11 show activities to be performed by an asεay and the order in which the activities are to be performed. Referring more specifically to FIG. 10, a sequence of four activities is shown: a first pipetting activity (Pl), a first reading activity (Rl), a second pipetting activity (P2), and a second reading activity (R2). This sequence of activities can be, for. example, the sequence for the FPIA asεay as described in more detail below. Referring to FIG. 11, a second sequence of activities is shown including two pipetting activities (Pl) and (P2), a washing activity (W), a diεpenεing activity (D), and a reading activity (R). Thiε sequence representε, for example, the MEIA sequence of activities alεo described in more detail below. The second specification of the flexible protocol, i.e., the incubation schedule, relates to the incubation periods between the activities aε εhown in FIGS. 12 and 13. The incubation schedule defines the time periods between the activities, i. e. , the time dependencies between the activities. More specifically, the incubation period includes a nominal time lapse between two activities, i. e. , the nominal incubation period (NIP), and the amount of time that it can be varied, i. e. , the incubation window. The incubation window includes the amounts of time which the scheduler may add to or subtract from the nominal incubation period (NIP) to optimize throughout of the syεtem 2. Referring more εpecifically to FIG. 12, the nominal incubation period (NIP) defineε the time between the pipetting activity (P) and the reading activity (R). The nominal incubation period can be reduced by the amount of time indicated by the negative portion of the window, in which case the reading activity (R) will occur sooner, or increased by the amount of time indicated the positive portion of the window, in which case the reading activity (R) will occur later. Thus, the scheduler haε enough flexibility to vary the incubation period from time Tl to time T2 to optimize the taεk being performed on the εystem 2. Referring to FIG. 13, six incubation schedule rules are shown with respect to time. These rules describe the proper and improper sequence of activities associated with incubation periods. Rule (1) specifieε that one activity can initiate more than one incubation period. More εpecifically, the first pipetting activity (Pl) initiates a firεt incubation period (IP1) conεtraining the reading activity (R), aε well aε a εecond incubation period (IP2) conεtraining the ocσurrence of a second pipetting activity (P2). However, the converse iε not permitted. Referring to Rule (2), only one incubation period can terminate in an activity. In other wordε, one activity cannot be conεtrained by more than one incubation period. For example, the second pipetting activity (P2) cannot be constrained by the two incubation periods (IPl) and (IP2) initiated by the first pipetting activity (Pl) and the reading activity (R), respectively. The flexible protocol technology would invalidate this sequence. Referring to Rule (3), the last activity of an assay must be a * termination point for an incubation period. Thus, the flexible protocol technology would invalidate the second reading activity (R2) because it does not terminate an incubation period, unlike the first reading activity (Rl) which terminates the incubation period (IP) initiated by the pipetting activity (P). Such "post-incubation" activities are not permisεible. Referring to Rule (4), activities not constrained by an incubation period that occur prior to the first incubation period are permissible. These "pre-incubation" activities such as, for example, the first pipetting activity (Pl) and the firεt reading activity (Rl), are permisεible activities in an aεεay even though they are not constrained by an intervening incubation period, aε long aε they occur prior to the firεt incubation period (IP) which conεtrainε the εecond pipetting activity (P2) and the εeσond reading activity (R2). Although pre-incubation activities are permissible, Rule (5) specifies that activities constrained by an incubation period cannot precede a pair of unrelated activities constrained by a second incubation period. More specifically, referring to the specific example for Rule (5), even though the pipetting activity (P2) and reading activity -(R2) are constrained with respect to each other by the second incubation period (IP2), they float in time because neither are constrained by either the first pipetting activity (Pl) or the first reading activity (Rl). Finally, Rule (6) states that an activity can float unconstrained -between two other activities constrained by an incubation period. More specifically, the first and second pipetting activities (Pl) and (P2) are constrained by the incubation period (IP) which does not constrain the reading activity (R). The reading activity (R) is a float activity which is not conεtrained by time, but only conεtrained by itε order with respect to the o£hier two activities, i.e. , it must occur after the first pipetting activity (Pl) and before the second pipetting activity (P2). The third specification of the flexible protocol technology, the activity description, specifieε how activities are to be performed and their time duration, i. e. , the timing protocol, aε indicated above. Referring more εpecifically to FIG. 14, the timing protocol for a pipetting activity (P) is shown. This particular pipetting activity (P) is similar to the one used for the MEIA asεay which requireε three resources of the analyzing system 2, including the primary carousel 46, the auxiliary carousel 64, and the process pipettor 50. The pipetting activity (P) consi-sts of 6 events, commencing with a pre-wash event at time Tl when the application software determines that the pipettor 50 must ,be cleaned of contaminants from a previous pipetting activity. If, however, the system software knows that the previous pipetting activity will not contaminate the current pipetting activity (P), the pre-wash event will not occur. The pre-wash event will be described in more detail below. The duration of the pre-wash period is known to the εystem software which commences execution of the pipetting activity (P) relative to the second event related to the primary carousel 46. The second event occurs at time T2 corresponding to the amount of time that elapseε before the reaction veεεel 34 is available on the primary carouεel 46 for the pipettor 50. The reaction veεεel 34 will not be available until other activitieε have been completed and the primary carouεel 46 has been repositioned if neceεεary. At time T2, the pipettor 50 begins aspirating fluid from the reaction vesεel 34. When fully aεpirated, the pipettor 50 moves into poεition with the auxiliary carouεel 64. The pipetting period for the primary carouεel 46, time T2 to time T4, includeε the time neceεεary for the pipettor 50 to aεpirate fluid from the reaction veεεel 34 and the amount of time necessary for the pipettor 50 to move clear from the primary carousel 46. The third event occurs at time T3 representing the amount of time that elapses before the cartridge 68 is available on the auxiliary carousel 64 for the process pipettor 50. At time T3, the auxiliary carousel 64 is in position for the pipettor 50 to begin dispenεing the fluid into the cartridge 68. Events 4 and 5 occur at times T4 and T5, respectively, and represent the time after which the carouselε 46, 64 are no longer needed for the current pipetting activity (P), and are available for εubεequent activities. When the auxiliary carousel 64 becomes available, the pipetting period from time T2 through time T5 iε complete. After the pipetting period, the pipetting activity (P) concludes with the completion of a post-wash cycle at time T6. Whether or not the post-wash cycle is necesεary iε dependent on whether the current pipetting activity (P) would contaminate the next activity to be performed. The foregoing description clearly showε that the flexible protocol technology enables the scheduler to properly sequence asεay activities, compress incubation periods and perform other functions so that the analyzing syεtem 2 iε optimized to operate continuouεly at high throughput rates. The flexible protocol technology is to be distinguished from a "fixed" protocol, such as the one disclosed in European Patent Application 410, 645 published January 30, 199-1, which describes an analyzer restricted to a fixed cycle that cannot be optimized. When the scheduler begins the process of scheduling a test, the process is broken into two stages: (1) the scheduler reviews the assay activities just deεcribed and the fixed εystem activities, εuch as for example reaction vessel 34 loading and unloading activities and cartridge 68 loading and unloading activities, to ensure that execution of the test will not clash with the activities of other tests in process before the test iε kitted, and (2) an attempt to perform each test activity prior to its original scheduled execution time within the parameters of the aεεay protocol to minimize the amount of time resourceε are idle and increaεe the throughput of teεtε in the εyεtem. in the firεt εtage, the operator chooεeε the order that teεtε are prepared to run on the εyεtem 2 by εelecting the placement of εampleε 26 on the εyεtem 2. The εample 26 placed cloεeεt to the pipette station iε the firεt εample prepared to run on the system 2. To guard against evaporation, a test will not be prepared until the scheduler ensures that all resources used by the test' s activities will be available at the required times set forth in the test' s aεεay protocol. Preparation of the next teεt in line iε postponed when activities of other tests in progress are using resources at the time required by an activity of the next test. The sample preparation area of the syεtem 2 remains idle until the next test is succesεfully scheduled without conflict. For example, if a pipetting activity (P) requiring twenty secondε must be performed sometimes during a two-minute window within 3-5 minutes after a kitting activity, preparation is postponed until the pipetting activity can be accomplished somewhere in that window. When proper scheduling of the next test can be achieved, the test will be prepared and transferred into the procesε area. The εecond εtage of the εσheduling proceεε iε to optimize the workload for each εyεtem reεource to minimize both the reεource' ε idle time and the time required to perform the reεource' ε workload. Once teεtε are transferred into the procesε area, the εcheduler optimizeε the existing schedule for each resource. At predetermined intervalε, the εcheduler examines the next interval of work for each resource. If there is any idle time in this interval, the scheduler attempts to minimize the idle time by rearranging the resource' s workload to eliminate idle time, providing the activitieε remain within their allowed incubation windows. When optimization of this interval is complete, this section of the workload is performed by the resource at the designated times. The scheduler continues to prepare samples as long as there are samples 26 on the system 2 that have tests ordered to be run. Optimization of the resourceε' workloadε will continue until all teεtε tranεferred into the εyεtem have finiεhed processing. Another feature of the invention provides a procedure for interrupting the scheduler' s preparation of samples 26. According to this feature, the operator of the syεtem 2 identifieε a εample 26 for priority handling (hereinafter the "stat εample") in both the front-end εample area and the processing area of the analytical syεtem 2. The operator chooεes the order that tests are prepared to run on the system 2 by selecting the placement of samples 26 on the sample carousel 28. The sample 26 placed closest to the pipette station is the first sample prepared to run on the syεtem 2. Thiε pattern of sample 26 preparation is interrupted whenever the operator plaσeε a εtat teεt on the system 2. Whenever a εtat teεt iε ordered, the εyεtem 2 will finish preparing the test on the current sample, and then move directly to the stat εample to prepare all itε teεtε. To guard againεt evaporation, εample preparation will not begin for a test before proper scheduling of the test' s activitieε in the proceεεing area is ensured. The system scheduling algorithm is also -modified for stat procesεing. The scheduling algorithm used for normal tests attempts to maximize the number of tests procesεed in the instrument each hour. This occurs by allowing sufficient time between test activities to enable other testε' activitieε to be performed in theεe gapε. The εcheduling approach used for stat tests attempts to process this one test in the shortest amount of time possible. Each activity of a stat test is εcheduled at the earlieεt possible time of execution aε defined in the test' ε aεεay definition. When all activitieε of a teεt are guaranteed proper εcheduling in the syεtem 2, εample preparation of the teεt will • begin. After all teεtε on the εtat εample are prepared, the εyεtem 2 will return to the εample 26 it was working on before it serviced the εtat εample. Stat teεtε receive εpeci ' al consideration in the proceεεing area when there iε idle time in a reεource' ε workload. At predetermined intervals, the scheduler examineε the next interval of work allocated to each reεource in the processing area of the system. if there iε any idle time during thiε interval, the εcheduler attempts to minimize it by rearranging the resource' ε workload as deεcribed above in greater detail. Test activities scheduled for this resource that can be performed earlier than they are currently scheduled, as defined by their assay protocols, are moved forward to fill the idle time.* Stat test activities are the first candidates to be pulled forward in the workload, thus further decreasing the amount of time needed to process the stat test in the instrument. Although stat tests receive special scheduling treatment, it does so without negatively affecting the system' s throughout. SMART WASH The present invention additionally provides a method and apparatus for identifying analytical interactions which are likely to occur between various steps in a random access analytical system, particularly stepε involving pipetting sequences in which the likely interactionε are carryover by or croεε contamination of test samples or reagents. The method and apparatuε of the present invention determineε when thoεe interactionε are likely and allows for random access processing even in those situationε (that is, the method and apparatus allows the syεtem to react in a different manner in inεtanceε in which those interactions are likely, than in instanceε in which the interactionε are leεε likely). The invention can do thiε becauεe the εystem εoftware (in particular, the εcheduler software) is able to randomly insert and remove pipetting eventε from the proceεεing timeline in order to control carryover or cross-contamination. By so inserting and removing pipetting events, the system varies test sample and reagent wash volumes to correspond with -wash volumes necessary for the particular test samples or reagents being processed in order to eliminate the posεibility of interactionε. The preεent invention is capable of controlling carryover or contamination by utilizing a simple matrix, as described below in detail. The matrix is set up in order to relate the particular pipetting steps performed by the εyεtem to the potential of those εtepε for carryover and contamination. Baεed upon valueε determined by the εystem from that matrix, the εyεtem modifieε waεh volumeε between pipetting εtepε to minimize waεh volumeε but to allow sufficient wash volumes to eliminate contamination or carryover. The apparatus and method of the invention is particularly useful when incorporated in the automated analytical εyεtem particularly described herein, which system is capable of simultaneously performing two or more assays on a plurality of test samples in a continuous and random access fashion. In order to reduce carryover and contamination, the present syεtem and method, in effect, looks at the sourσeε that create the problem. This can be better understood in concept by considering the general scheme of the scheduler software and the pipetting and wash stepε. Since each pipette step can result in carryover or contamination, as well as possibly be senεitive to carryover, the -preεent invention provides simple categories for the contaminating potential of each pipette step and then identifies to which of those categories each asεay εtep is εensitive. This is where the aforementioned matrix comes into play. The matrix is set up to identify when carryover or contamination is likely, based upon preceding and succeeding pipetting εtepε scheduled by the εcheduler εoftware. The apparatuε and method, baεed upon values from the matrix corresponding to the preceding and succeeding pipetting steps, causes the analytical syεtem to reεpond with appropriate wash characteristics to eliminate the possibility of undesirable carryover or contamination when they appear likely. In operation, the analytical syεtem is automatically cleaned to a nominal level, εuitable for eliminating carryover or contamination in the typical inεtance. In the prior syεtemε, it waε neceεεary that the εyεtem be cleaned at an extreme level which would eliminate carryover or contamination in the worst cases. The present invention, however, provides for extra washing in those cases in which the syεtem εoftware identifieε, based on the scheduled sequence, the situation of a potentially contaminating εtep occurring before a εensitive step. In the instance of that combination, the software causes the syεtem to activate a predetermined super wash that is adequate for controlling the carryover in those extreme instances. This approach in the present invention reduces the amount of washing performed by the system because sensitive steps do not necessarily always follow contaminating steps and so the super wash is not always employed. In short, the method of the system accounts for both the situation where normal waεh iε required and the situation where a greater wash is required, and determines which type wash is necesεary in any instance, even though it is not possible, due to the random and continuous access nature of the system, to know a pri ori when carryover is or is not likely to occur. The present invention also allows for pipette steps to be removed or inserted into the processing timeline as required due to the random access nature of the syεtem, and maintainε the syεtem to eliminate the possibility of a contaminating situation. Even further, the invention allows the software to adjust the required washing without having to manipulate other pipetting steps in the processing timeline, even in a system which allows continuous operation. The method and apparatus are designed to minimize wash fluid consumption by the instrument by having the system software track some basic information relating to the pipetting steps that immediately precede and follow any given- ■* step on the timeline. Since they involve the interaction of all assayε with one another, it iε preferred that all assayε uεe the same approach to cleaning the- pipette within their protocol. Unlike wash syεterns and methods previously described, the method according to the present invention (1) reduces wash volumeε to help the management of onboard liquid and waεte; and (2) reduceε waεhing times to help improve throughput. In particular, probe wash control in systems previously described waε provided by recommendations for post waεhing after each pipetting block as follows: Pipetting ι Post > Pipetting i Post Sequence l| Wash 1 Sequence 2 | Wash 2 According to the invention, the basic pipette cleaning is provided as before, i. e. , with a post wash which should be sufficient to control carryover for most of asεay εtepε that might follow it. However, if the recommended poεt waεh iε inadequate for controlling cross-contamination or carryover to the following step, then a prewash iε incorporated for that εecond εtep as follows: Pipetting ι Post > Pre • Pipetting ι Post Sequence 1 | Wash 1 Wash 2 | Sequence 2 | Wash 2 The prewash is variable and has two levelε, nominal and super. The nominal prewash is the volume that εhould be uεed all the time. When carryover iε possible, the super wash would then be used. Typically, the nominal wash volume would be zero. Since the methodology software feature identifies when carryover is possible, the post wash volumeε uεed across the system can be reduced in value from what they were prior to the method, whereby each asεay iε no longer required to be cleaned well enough to control the worεt case carryover situation. Additional wash needed to control carryover will be added through the super waεh when the εoftware identifies a carryover potential. Parameters, Tables and Terminology for Smart Waεh The method preferably utilizes five parameters to describe each pipetting step, two index values and three wash parameters, wherein (i) the two index valueε are εuε (suεceptibility to contamination) and con (probability to contaminate); and (ii) the three waεh parameterε are nom (nominal prewash number), εup (super prewash number), and pw (post waεh number). The waεh parameters are not volumes. The wash parameters are numbers that identify washes in a wash library as described below. Current Wash Library Wash Total Number Volume Waste Washcu 0 0 ml - — 1 2 1 ml 1 ml 2 2.5 1 1.5 3 3 1 2 4 3.5 1.5 ' 2 ' 5 4 2 2 6 4.5 2 2.5 7 5 2 3 8 1 no yes 9 2 no yes 10 3 no yes 11 4 no yes 12 5 no yes The suε and con parameters are used to flag the probability for carryover or crosε-contamination to occur. They are related to each other through the matrix of the preεent method. , The matrix of the present method contains only 0' s and 1' s, corresponding to off and on, respectively; 0 = no probability for carryover; 1 = probability for carryover does exist. Method Matrix sji-B. parameter none 1 0 0 0 con w/airgap 2 0 1 1 parameter w/o airgap 3 0 0 1 con description 1 not contaminating (no εample) 2 aεpiration of εample or εample mix with airgap 3 aεpiration of εample or sample mix without an airgap sus description 1 not susceptible to contamination 2 senεitive to aεpiration of εample or εample mix with an airgap 3 εenεitive to aεpiration of sample or sample mix without and with an airgap For example, a pipette block is susceptible to all sample pipetting (sus index = 3). For a preceding pipette step which has a con index of 1 (matrix value = 0), no super wash is performed. For a preceding pipette step which has a con index of 2 or 3 (matrix value = 1), the super wash is performed. The matrix of the present method provides information to the software that the probability for carryover or crosε-contamination exists, but it does not provide information to the software as to what volumes to use for a wash step, which is instead provided from the nom, sup and pw parameters. The matrix of the present method may be expanded εhould other contaminating εpecieε in addition to sample be defined. The con parameter and the pw numbers describe to the software what state the probe iε in prior to the next pipetting εtep. The rules eεtablished for identifying these parameters for pipetting steps are requirements for all assays to follow. The con and pw parameters are defined aε follows: Description con value >V number /vol Not contaminating (no sample) 1 (2 ml) Asp of sample/sample mix with airgap 2 *<= 50 μl aspirated 1 (2 ml ) *<= 100 μl aspirated 3 (3 ml) Λ <= 150 μl aspirated 5 (4 ml ) Aεpirating > 150 μl of εample or εample mix with an airgap iε diεcouraged becauεe of the neceεεity to uεe excessive washing. Asp of εample/εample mix without an airgap 3, use the same pw values as above. " *" indicates the level of sample carryover present when the method of the present invention iε not utilized (post waεh only) iε 10 ppm or leεε with the above recommendationε. In all cases, the minimum allowable pw value is 2 ml waεh. The εuε, nom and εup parameterε are under the control of the aεsay protocol. It is to be understood that any criteria establiεhed for identifying theεe parameters are recommendations, and that the assay protocol developer will best know which pipetting sequences are senεitive to carryover, which εequenceε create the problem and what wash volume iε neceεεary to clean the probe. Nominal and super waεheε are uεed for a susceptible pipette block for control of carryover. Use 0 for Waεh Library numberε 8 through 12, where only waεh to washcup is needed: nom = 0 - no nominal prewash is preformed; nom = 8 to 12 -- vise Waεh Library numbers 8 through 12 (1-5 ml wash-waεhcup); sup = 0; no super prewash is performed; εup = 8 to 12 — use Waεh Library numberε 8 through 12 (1-5 ml wash-waεhcup). Becauεe of εcheduling constraints, the super wash volume may not be greater than the minimum post wash (2 ml), plus the nominal wash; if it is necesεary to uεe more super waεh volume, the nominal wash should be increased as well. For example, if the nominal wash is 0 ml, super wash may only be 0, 1 or 2 ml. If the required super wash iε 4 ml, nominal wash must be at least 2 ml. The minimum post wash requirement and super wash volume constraint not only ensures proper scheduling, but alεo protects the syεtem from a highly contaminating εtep being "hidden" from a εusceptible εtep becauεe a εimple εtep εits between them on the timeline that needε only a minimum waεh. The minimum poεt waεh requirement guaranteeε that the probe will be properly cleaned when that εusceptible εtep iε to be pipetted. The kitting center is treated aε one pipette block. Carryover experimentε have εhown that a poεt wash of at least about 2 ml iε εufficient to clean the probe to a carryover level of 1 ppm or leεε when εample iε kitted firεt followed by waεh and pipetting of reagentε. Total waεh following εample εhould be about 4 ml total waεh before next kitting activity. Contamination of the reagent bottle following εample will come from the outεide of the probe. Thiε is reduced to insignificant levels by wash to waste cup, e. g. , 200 to 1, 000 μl, followed by from between about 1 ml to about 2 ml wash to the wash cup. Chemiluminescent Teεt According to another embodiment, methodε and apparatuε are provided for meaεuring a chemilumineεcent εignal produced by an immune complex formed with analyte from a teεt εample εuch aε chemilumineεcent homogeneous immunoaεεayε and chemilumineεcent heterogeneous immunoasεayε. According to one embodiment, a chemilumineεσent detection εignal is produced by an immobilized immune complex comprising antibody coated magnetic particles which are separated by a magnetic field. According to such method, an optical cuvette containing the immune complex bound to magnetic particles suεpended in solution is utilized wherein a magnetic field is imposed along the wall of the cuvette to perform the separation. The particles which contain the immune complex are washed, a trigger reagent is added, and the resulting chemiluminescence from the labeled particles is detected and measured in the cuvette using a chemiluminescent detection syεtem. According to another method, analyte is captured in a liquid phase employing, for example, microparticles, polyionic capture agents and the like, having a binding affinity for the analyte wherein the capture analyte is subsequentially immobilized by a porouε element and a chemiluminescent εignal iε then chemically excited and detected. Accordingly, εuch method within a continuouε and random acceεε analytical εyεtem advantageouεly employs fast fusion rates in solution to provide highly sensitive asεayε for a wide range of analytes. Such methods are particularly useful with an automated, continuous and random acceεε analytical εyεtem apparatus as described herein, and which can further include fluorescent and chemiluminescent assay processing on the same platform. Such automated analytical system-.-of the present invention is capable of simultaneously performing two or more assays on a plurality of test samples in a continuous and random accesε faεhion. In particular, the automated immunoassay analytical syεtem apparatuε of the invention can be viewed as a miσroprocesεor baεed εyεtem of integrated εubaεεe blieε with different groups of assayε being run through εeparate and changeable εoftware modules. The microproceεεor baεed εyεtem uses robotic arm pipetters with two degrees of freedom and bidirectional rotating carousels to procesε εampleε. Critical " aεεay steps εuch as incubations, washes and specimen dilution are performed automatically by the instrument aε scheduled. In particular, the automated, continuous and random accesε analytical εyεtem apparatuε iε capable of performing chemiluminescent assays εuch aε described in commonly owned U. S. Patent No. 5, 089, 424 and U. S. Patent Application No. 206,645 filed June 14, 1988, which are each incorporated herein by reference. As described, at least two types of chemiluminescent assayε are poεsible by the syεtem apparatus, magnetic particle capture and microparticle membrane capture. Chemiluminescent asεay proceεses opera.te by taking advantage of light scattering properties of certain conjugate molecules. Those procesεes may be either homogeneous or heterogeneous. In the homogeneous assay procesεeε, light abεorption of a liquid medium containing particular antibodieε iε measured. The antibodies are then reacted with antigens to form a precipitate. The antigen-antibody precipitate solution is then subjected to the light which is absorbable by the antibody. The difference in the light abεorption meaεured by the two light abεorption steps is determined and that difference iε indicative of the preεenσe or abεenσe of agglutination of antibody and antigen. Becauεe the agglutination reaction reduces the concentration of antibody in solution, the light absorption by the liquid medium iε reduced in proportion to the degree of antigen-antibody precipitate formed. As is typical of methods and apparatus for performing homogeneous asεayε, theεe procedures do not require separation of a εolid phase from the reaction mixture for further . analyεiε. In heterogeneouε aεεay proceεseε, on the other hand, εolid phaεe material muεt be εeparated. In theεe processes, small amounts of clinically significant compounds in a liquid test sample are quantitated by focusing a light source on the sample. For example, a fluorescent light source might be used. In that case, fluorescent particles in the sample cause fluorescent conditions, the intensity of -which is related to the intensity of the light beam and the concentration of fluorescent particleε in the εample. A detector employed in connection with the light beam εenεeε photons forming the fluorescent emisεionε of the particleε when excited by the light beam. Solid phaεe material in the-εample must be subεequently separated from the mixture for further analysiε and before the fluoreεcent emissionε can be detected and meaεured. FIG. 15 iε a top plan view of the automated analytical εystem in ' section with component covers removed to show the automated analytical apparatus in detail and relative position of the two types of detection syεtems utilizing chemiluminescent assay technology, a magnetic particle capture system and a microparticle membrane capture syεtem, which may be employed in the present invention. In one of such detection εyεtemε, the proceεε carouεel haε two magnetic separation stations 67 and a chemiluminescent reader detection module 69 for magnetic particle capture incorporated thereon for providing chemiluminescent magnetic particle capture asεayε. In the other one of the detection εysterns, the cartridge wheel carousel has mounted thereon a chemiluminescent reader 71 for providing microparticle membrane capture asεays. A depiction .. in cross-sectional view of a signal detection module 69 for use in the magnetic particle capture system 67, 69 is shown in FIG. 16. The detection module 69 comprises a light guide 602. The module 69 is mounted horizontally in a housing 638 and positioned near the disposable cuvettes 140 (shown in phantom) on the reaction carousel 46 (not shown in FIG. 16). In this position, the signal detection module 69 can take readings of the contents of each cuvette 140 as it passes the module 69. In FIG. 17, a, depiction of a cross-εectional view of a εignal detection module 71 for use in the microparticle membrane capture syεtem is illustrated. The detection module 71 includes a light pipe 650. On either side of the light pipe 650 is positioned injeσtion conduits 652. The module 71 is mounted vertically above the fiber cartridgeε 654 of the reaction carousel 46 (not shown in FIG. 17) to position the module 71 for detection of contents of each cartridge 654 as it pasεeε the module. The module 71 alεo includeε a light εhield 660 which serves to shield environmental light from interfering with the reading. The cartridge 654 employed in this type system is a container which haε a funnel-shaped aperture 656 to the cartridge 654 and a solid, porous element 658, preferably in the form of a fibrous matrix. It is to be expressly understood that each of the magnetic particle capture system 69 and the microparticle membrane capture syεtem 71 εhown in FIG. 16 and 17, reεpectively, iε intended aε exemplary of thoεe type εysterns. Other systems and arrangements and configurations are possible. The operation of any such syεtem will, however, operate in about the same manner. Chemiluminescent released photons from the contents of the cuvette 140 or cartridge 654, as the case may be, are transmitted through a light pipe 602, 650 of the detection module 69, 71 to a photomultiplier tube (not shown). The module 69, 71 and photomultiplier tube asεembly measures the chemilumineεcent εignal of the contentε of the cuvette 140 or cartridge 654, as applicable. LIOUID LEVEL SENSING The preεent invention includeε a unique εyεtem and method for sensing fluid levels in the various sample containers of the automated analytical syεtem. The fluid level sensing syεtem detectε whenever the automated pipette probe contactε a liquid. The εystem detects amplitude changes in a near-radio frequency (RF) signal which is radiated by the probe and received by a series of antennas located below the various sample containers. The system can be thought of as detecting a change in capacitance between the probe and the applicable antenna when the probe contacts liquid. The εystem continually monitors the capacitance of the probe in air and detects a quick change in capacitance in response to .the probe contacting liquid. A significant feature of the fluid level sensing syεtem iε that liquid iε reported only when both signal amplitude and rate of εignal change indicate that the probe haε contacted liquid. Previouε systems which utilized signal amplitude to detect liquids reported liquid detections based only on signal amplitudeε exceeding a preset threshold. Therefore, these systems were adversely affected by changes in εignal amplitude induced by changes in temperature, humidity, aging of parts, parts variation, and most significantly, probe position in relation to other components in the automated analytical system. These conditions caused previous systems at times to falsely indicate the presence of fluid, or conversely, to fail to detect fluid presence. Basing liquid detections on both signal amplitude and rate of change of signal amplitude greatly reduces the number of such false or failed detections. Some previous liquid level detection systems detected an electrical phase shift of a sinusoidal signal present on the pipette probe whenever the probe contacted a liquid. These phase-shift systems were limited, however, -to analytical systems which utilized only de-ionized water in the fluid line to the probe. The present invention' s use of signal amplitude for liquid detection enables the use of a conductive diluent, such as saline solution, in the fluid line to the pipette probe. FIG. 18 is. a simplified block diagram of the preferred embodiment of the liquid level εenεing εyεtem 800 of the preεent invention in connection with an automated analytical εyεtem. A liquid level εenεing circuit board 801 iε utilized to monitor pipette probeε 806 and 807 when enabled by the automated analytical εyεtem computer (not εhown), and to εtop probe movement when the probeε have contacted liquid. The liquid level εenεing circuit board 801 mountε in a standard VME card cage, receiving only about +5V and ground from the VME buε at connections 814 and 818. DC/DC converters (not shown) on the board generate local operating voltages, isolating the board from the VME bus. Control signals to and from the board are routed to syεtem I/O boardε (not εhown) through conneσtionε 816 and 820. The board 801 contains a process liquid level senεing circuit 803 and a kitting liquid level εenεing circuit 805, each completely independent of the other. The process liquid level sensing circuit 803 is dedicated to liquid detections by probe 806 in the process center, and the kitting liquid level senεing circuit 805 iε dedicated to liquid deteσtionε by probe 807 in the kitting center. The liquid detection εyεte s in the procesε center and in the kitting center are eεεentially identical, and liquid detectionε occur in the same manner in each εyεtem. Therefore, the following description, although describing the liquid detection εyεtem in the process center, is equally applicable to the.kitting center. Each of the two circuits 803 and 805 is controlled by a "CALIBRATE" signal from the analytical syεtem computer, and each circuit provideε two output εignalε, "READY" and "DETECT". In operation, CALIBRATE iε εet except when level εenεing iε deεired. Calibration is performed by an auto-zero circuit 811 described in more detail below. The probe 806 is placed over a liquid sample container 819, preferably immediately over the fluid, and the analytical εyεtem computer εetε deεired gain bitε which compensate for the various sizeε of εample containerε 819. When the circuit iε calibrated so that its output signal level is zero, CALIBRATE iε de-asserted and READY is asserted. The probe is then moved toward the εample container 819 until liquid iε encountered, at which time DETECT iε εet. The analytical system computer receives the DETECT signal and, in turn, signalε the motor controller (not shown) to stop vertical probe movement. DETECT remains set as long as the probe 806 iε in liquid. When the probe iε removed from liquid, DETECT iε de-aεεerted, but will reεet if liquid is contacted again. When the probe is withdrawn from the liquid, and fluid εenεing iε no longer required, CALIBRATE is again asεerted. In CALIBRATE mode DETECTS do not occur, being diεabled logically, regardleεε of the analog signal received. A coax cable 802 carrieε an RF tranεmit εignal from a low impedance driver εignal source 824 on the εensing system circuit board 801 to the probe 806. A receiving antenna 813 is mounted in a stationary position below each rotating carouεel, and beneath the area where liquid εenεing iε desired. In the kitting center, liquid detectionε occur in εeveral locationε; thus antenna 810 and antenna array 812 are mounted below the reaction veεsel 34, the reagent pack 30, and the teεt εample εegment container 26. The antennas are connected to the εenεing εyεtem circuit board 801 by triax cables 808 and 809. The RF signal is generated by the low impedance driver signal source 824, at a frequency of approximately 125 KHz, and is applied to the probe 806 through the coax cable 802. The RF signal then couples across the air space between the probe 806 and the receive antenna 813, located below the liquid sample container 819. In operation, when the probe 806 is lowered and contacts liquid, the signal from the probe to the antenna .increases slightly above that received when the probe is in air. The signal increases because the liquid surface, in effect, becomeε part of the tranεmitting probe, increasing the amplitude of the transmitted signal and redirecting the probe' s electromagnetic field toward the receiving antenna 813. The signal is coupled from the probe 806 to the antenna 813 primarily by an electrical field, which can be mathematically modeled by capacitance. The transmiεεion media may be conεidered aε a small capacitance from the probe 806 to the receiving antenna 813. This type of level senεing may therefore be referred to aε capacitance level εenεing. Since the electrical field iε actually part of an electromagnetic field radiating from the probe, the εenεing device may alεo be referred to aε an "RF" (radio frequency) εenεing εyεtem, although the actual frequency employed is several octaves below standard radio frequencies. FIG. 19 iε a more detailed block diagram of the preferred embodiment of the liquid level senεing εystem 800 of the present invention in connection with an automated analytical system. The fluid level senεing system 800 includes a synchronous (heterodyne) receiver which includes an amplitude detector 841 and a low pass filter 845. The receiver provides exceptionally narrow-band reception of the electrical signals detected by the antennas. In the synchronous receiver, the amplitude detector 841 multiplies the incoming signal 830 by a reference εignal 843 in order to enable the extraction of amplitude information. The εignal source 824 alεo useε the reference signal 843 to generate the transmitted signal 826, therefore both the transmitted and received signals are of subεtantially the εame frequency. The incoming εignal mύεt also be subεtantially in phaεe with the reference εignal. After the incoming εignal 830 iε multiplied by the reference signal 843, the output of the amplitude detector 841 is paεεed through the low paεε filter 845 to extract the amplitude information desired. The filter employed in the receiver of the preferred embodiment iε a Beεεel linear phaεe filter, which demonεtrateε minimal or no overshoot, and minimal or no ringing. The liquid detection εystem 800 alεo includeε an autozero circuit 811 which enhanceε εignal detection in the preferred embodiment of the preεent invention. As the diεtance from the probe 806 to the antenna 813 changeε, and aε the probe approacheε components within the automated analytical system with dielectric σonstantε higher than the surrounding air, the level of the signal reaching the antenna 813 slowly changes. The autozero circuit 811 enables the fluid sensing syεtem 800 to detect fluid with a very small increase in the received signal strength (approximately 0.2 pf) because the increase when the probe contacts liquid occurs very rapidly compared to the change that occurs when moving the probe 806 toward the antenna 813 in air. The autozero circuit 811 nulls out signalε which εlowly change in amplitude, and reportε only rapidly • changing εignalε which exceed a predetermined threεhold value. The autozero circuit timing iε εuch that the output of the circuit iε maintained at about zero when the probe 806 is stationary or moving vertically. ■ I l l - Changes in signal amplitude which occur slowly, .such as those caused by the probe approaching other components of the automated analytical syεtem, are therefore reduced below the predetermined threεhold value by the autozero circuit, and are not reported aε liquid detections even if the amplitude variations exceed the threshold value. A rapid signal increase may occur in less than 200 microseconds due to fluid contact by the probe. When a rapid signal increase occurs, the autozero circuitry allows the output from low pass Besεel filter 844 to increase, The signal then paεεes through a second low pass filter 845 and iε applied to a 2-volt εimple fixed threshold 846. If the signal does not exceed the threshold value, the liquid detection system is maintained in the READY mode at 847. If the increase caused by fluid contact is sufficient to exceed the threshold 846, then a digital bit is output asserting DETECT at 848. At that time, the autozero circuit 811 is disabled. The DETECT εignalε are routed to the εystem motor control board at 849, so that when fluid is detected, the motor control board (not shown) can immediately stop the probe movement. Still referring to FIG. 19, it may be seen that the fluid sensing circuit 803 is referenced to system ground in the immediate vicinity of its associated reσeiving antenna 813. As noted previously, the circuit 803 iε connected to its antenna 813 by the triax cable 808 which, in the preferred embodiment, is about ten feet in total length. The outermost conductor of the triax cable 851, connects to a grounding plate for the antenna 852, and to a εyεtem baεeplate 853, providing the ground reference for the circuit. The inner εhield of the triax cable 854 iε a "driven εhield". The inner shield 854 is connected at one end to a driven εhield plate for the antenna 855, and at the other end to the shield output side of a signal and driven -shield circuit 840. The signal from the antenna 813 is carried by the inner conductor 856 to the input of the signal and driven shield circuit 840. The signal and driven shield circuit 840 acts as a buffer which, in turn, drives the inner εhield 854. This reduces the effective capacitance of the cable 808 and antenna 813 by a factor of about sixty. The total capacitance of the antenna and ten-foot cable is normally about 600 pf. The εignal and driven εhield circuit 840 effectively reduces thiε capacitance to about 10 pf. Thiε reduction greatly simplifies the detection of the 0.2 pf increase in signal strength that occurs when the probe 806 contacts liquid. Besεel filters are used in the transmit circuitε for repeatability and in the receive circuit for minimum ringing due to noise spikes, resulting in minimum noise levels within the εyεtem. Sharper filterε have potentially high overshoots and actually result in a higher noise and ripple level. FIG. 20 is a simplified schematic diagram showing the current flow through the fluid level εenεing εyεtem 800 of the present invention. Total current 826 flows from the signal source 824 to the probe 806 where it is divided into two paths. In one path, current 836 leaves the probe and flows through diluent to ground, returning to the signal source 824. The diluent iε represented by .diluent resistance 834 and diluent coupling capacitance 838. Separately, a much smaller current 830 enters the probe 806 and couples through space to the receive antenna 813. Capacitor 828 represents the capacitance of the probe 806 in air. When the probe contacts liquid, additional current flows through the additional fluid capacitance 832, added by the increased surface area of the liquid.. The wavelength of the transmitted signal is small compared to the geometries within the automated analytical syεtem, therefore almoεt all of the coupling from the probe 806 to the antenna 813 iε by the electric field. By applying a low impedance tranεmit εignal to the probe and receiving the εignal with a separate antenna, shunting effects of conductive diluent in the probe plumbing are avoided. It should be noted that the signal and driven shield circuit 840 (FIG. 19) measures only current from the antenna 813, not the current through the diluent. FIG. 21 is an illustration of the geometries between the probe 806, its electromagnetic field 815, a liquid sample container 819, and the antenna 813 when the probe is in air. The antenna 813 is positioned directly below the liquid εample container, along the extension of the longitudinal axis of the eεsentially linear probe 806. As shown in FIG. 21, the electrical signal 815 radiated by the probe in air is strongeεt on a plane X-X which iε perpendicular to the longitudinal axiε and at the center of the probe' ε length. There is a null Y in the electrical signal along the extension of the longitudinal axis. Therefore, when the probe 806 is in air, very little εignal reacheε the antenna 813. FIG. 22 is an illustration of the geometries between the probe 806, its electromagnetic field 815, ' a liquid sample container 819, and the antenna 813 when the probe contacts liquid. A greater signal level is radiated along the extension of the longitudinal axis than from the probe in air (see FIG. 21). Therefore, the signal level received by' the antenna 813 riseε significantly when the probe 806 contacts liquid. FIG. 23 illuεtrates that even the electromagnetic field 815 generated by the probe in liquid may be in¬ sufficient to generate enough signal at the antenna 813 to trigger a detection if the distance from the liquid sample container 819 to the antenna 813 is too great. This condition may arise when short sample cupε are used in the sample segment container 600 (FIG. 36). Therefore, the εample εegment container 600 is equipped with fluid level sensing sleeveε 608 mounted directly below the poεitions where short sample cups are inserted. The sensing sleeves 608 may be constructed of aluminum or " any other electrically conductive material. As εhown in FIG. 24, the εenεing εleeve 608 functionε to channel the electrical εignal 815 from the probe/liquid combination to the vicinity of the receiving antenna 813. The sleeveε 608 are mounted at a height at which the top of the sleeve approximately coincides with the top of the liquid in the εample cup. If the sleeve is mounted too high, it may cauεe falεe fluid detectionε due to channelling of the εignal from the probe in air. If the sleeve iε mounted too low, fluid detections will be miεεed becauεe the εleeve will not adequately function to channel the electrical εignal to the antenna 813. FIGS. 43 and 44 are crosε εectional, elevational views of a long test sample cup adaptor sleeve 649 and a short test sample cup adaptor εleeve 655, reεpectively. Theεe adaptor εleeves may be used with the short test sample Vacutainer® tube segment assembly of FIG. 4G. Each adaptor sleeve 649 and 655 is constructed with an electrically conductive core material 651 which may be, for example, aluminum. A liquid sample cup 653 is placed in the top of either type of adaptor sleeve. When the probe contacts liquid in the sample cup, the core material 651 conducts the electrical signal- from the probe/liquid combination to the vicinity of the receiving antenna 813 mounted below. FIG. 25 is a graphical representation of syεtem noiεe level verεuε εignal frequency. The graph illuεtrateε the importance of having a high center frequency (125 KHz) along with a narrow filter band width (250 Hz). The system noise level peaks at lower frequencies, and decreases aε frequency increases. Thus, it is advantageous to operate at higher frequencies with narrow band width to reduce noise. It is to be understood that the liquid level senεing system of the present invention can be utilized in any automated instrument where liquid level sensing is desired. SYRINGE BUBBLE FLUSHER The syringe according to the invention can be used in any automated analytical syεtem or other applicationε wherein fluidiσε are utilized in proceεses which are dependent on the precision and accuracy with which a syringe can aspirate and dispense fluids. A syringe which has the capacity for automatically flushing bubbles completely out of the fluidics system can achieve and maintain such precision and accuracy. The syringe, according to the present invention, is configured such that a piston reciprocates through a seal into a close-fitting bore. The bore has a closed end, and the bore and piston define an annulus chamber in communication with fluid inlet and outlet means. Fluid is introduced near the seal, through the fluid inlet means, and into the annulus around the piεton, creating a croεs-flow flushing bubbleε from the annuluε. While the croεs-flow is occurring, the piston is reciprocated within the bore. The reciprocation causes high fluid velocities in the annulus between the piεton and the bore. The high fluid velocity dislodges any bubbles that may be adhering to the piεton or bore wall. When the piεton εtrokeε to itε full inward extenεion, it comes very close to the bore end, thus dislodging any bubbles stuck on the bore end or piston end. Bubbles dislodged by the piston movement within the annulus chamber are swept out of the syringe by the cross-flowing fluid near the seal. Referring now to FIGS. 26, 27, and 28 in combination, there iε εhown a syringe 122 which aspirateε and diεpenses fluids to the various pipetting mechanismε and haε the ability to automatically flush bubbleε from the syringe 122. The ability of diagnostic instrumentation to accurately perform an assay is critically dependent on the precision and accuracy with which syringes, i. e. pipetting, can aspirate and dispenεe reagents and sampleε. The preciεion and accuracy of a εyringe iε εeverely degraded by the preεence of εmall air bubbles inside a syringe. Bubbles, unfortunately, are all too common and are difficult to remove or avoid. Syringe 122 avoids these problems by automatically flushing bubbleε completely out of the fluidics system. The syringe 122 is configured such that a piston 124 reciprocates through a seal 126 and into a cloεe-fitting bore 128. The end of the bore 130 is closed. The piεton 124 has a piston end 132 which approximates the geometry of the closed bore end 130. An annulus 138 exists between the piston 124 and bore 128. A fluid entry port 134 and a fluid exit port 136 are positioned 180 degrees apart and are located near the seal 126. Preεεurized fluid iε introduced to the fluid entry port 134. The fluid flows into the annulus 138, around both sideε of the piεton 124, and then exitε through the fluid exit port 136. Thiε croεεflow fluεhes bubbles from the area near the εeal 126. Still referring to FIGS. 26, 27, and 28 in combination, while the cross flow through the annulus 138 near the seal 126 is occurring, the piston 124 is reciprocated inside the bore 128. Thiε reciprocation causes high fluid flow velocities in the annulus 138 between the piston 124 and the bore 128. The high flow velocity diεlodgeε any bubbleε that may be adhering to the piston 124 or--bore wall. The inward stroke of the piston 124 pusheε theεe diεlodged bubbleε to the croεεflow area where they are swept out of the syringe 122 by the crosεflow. The piston end 132 and the bore end 130 have similar spherical shapeε. When the piεton 124 εtrokes to its full inward extension, it comes very cloεe to the bore end 130. Any bubble that may be stuck on the bore end 130 iε disrupted and diεlodged. Likewise, the bubbleε from the bore end 130 and the piεton end 132 are diεlodged and puεhed to the croεsflow area where they are swept out of the syringe 122 by the crossflow. The sequence of reciprocating the piston while crosεflowing occurε can be * automatically executed any time by the εyεtem apparatuε. Referring still to FIGS. 26, 27, and 28, once the fluid leaves the fluid exit port 136 of the syringe 122, it must travel through a tube fitting, through a length of tubing, through another tube fitting, into a probe 106 and out the probe tip 108. It is at the probe tip 108 that the aspirating and dispensing of reagents actually occurs. Any bubbles trapped between the syringe and the probe tip will also degrade performance, so there must be no place for the bubbles flushed out of the syringe to lodge. It is therefore necesεary to use zero dead volume tubing fittings on the tubing between the syringe and the probe. In operation of the bubble flushing aspect of the syringe 122 of the present invention, the initial withdrawal velocity of the piston from the at rest or home position 124' is slower than the velocity of the piston as it approaches a total withdrawal position- 124". Thiε type of manipulation of the piεton action in relationεhip to the end of the bore avoids high vacuum and bubble creation within the bore. On the other hand, the piston can be withdrawn from the home position 124' at full speed in order to expedite removal of preformed bubbles in the end of the bore. After εuch bubble fluεhing procedureε, the valves are closed and aεpiration can be perfected. If, however, the εyringe iε uεed for the diεpenεing aspect, the valve can be open for metered amounts of liquid to pass for dispensing purposeε. Referring now to FIG. 26, the operation of the aspirating aspect of the εyringe 122 can now be explained. Following the bubble fluεhing operation explained above, the piεton 124 is placed in a home position 124' and a zero dead volume two way solenoid valve 135 is closed. With the solenoid valve 135 closed, the fluid in the fluidics syεtem iε cloεed with the exception of the probe tip 108. The fluid in the fluidicε εyεtem iε a tryεs fluid, or hydraulic fluid medium, which preferably will not react or mix with the sample or reagent to be aspirated. Examples of hydraulic fluid mediums would include but are not limited to deionized water, saline solution, and the like, depending on the properties of the fluid to be aspirated. Still referring to FIG. 26, to aspirate a fluid the probe tip 108 iε poεitioned within the fluid to be aspirated. The piston 124 is then moved from the home position 124' to a position representing the amount of aspirated fluid. The withdrawal of the piston causes the hydraulic fluid medium to withdraw from the probe tip 108, thereby drawing into the probe tip 108 the fluid to be aspirated. The' probe tip 108 is then poεitioned to a location for expelling the fluid to be aεpirated. The fluid to be aspirated is then expelled by moving the piston 124 back to the home position 124' . Residual aspirated fluid can occasionally be fluεhed from the fluidicε syεtem by positioning the probe tip 108 in a location for dispoεing fluidε, opening the εolenoid valve 135, and forcing the hydraulic fluid medium through the fluidics syεtem. Once the fluidics syεtem haε been fluεhed, the solenoid valve 135 is closed and the syringe 122 can continue to be used for aspirating fluids. Referring again generally to FIGS. 26, 27, and 28, in combination, the syringe 122 configuration can be, but is not intended to be limited to, about 8.3" long, 3.5" wide and about 2.7" deep. A linear actuator 125 is mounted to the frame 123. An actuator motor 121 spins a nut means 127 into which a mating lead screw 137 is screwed. The lead screw 137 is clamped to the coupler 129 which has a bearing 131 mounted on its bottom side. The bearing 131 runs in a groove in the frame 123. Since the coupler 129 is rotationally constrained by the bearing 131, the coupler 129 reciprocates when the linear actuator motor 121 spins the nut means 127 and the piston 124 which is clamped into the coupler 129, thus reciprocating the piston 124 through the seal 126. The piεton 124 reciprocateε through the εeal 126 which is springloaded and carried by a polyethylene wear ring 133, the seal 126 being comprised of an O-ring over the polyethylene wear ring. The clearance between the piston and the bore is small and, according to a preferred embodiment, from between about 0.002" and about 0.008". When piston 124 reciprocates, very high flow rates are generated in the annulus 138 between the piston 124 and the bore 128. These high flow velocities flush bubbles in the bore 128 to the seal area where they are swept out of the syringe 122 by the cross flow. Zero (0) dead volume fittings are positioned between the syringe 122 and the tip release means ' to ensure that bubbles flushed out of the syringe 122 have no place to lodge as they are swept down the communicating tube and out the tip. It is to be understood that the syringe of the present invention can be used in any situation where the precise manipulation of fluids iε deεired, whether the syringe is operated manually or by an automated instrument, including, but not intended to be limited to, precision aspirating and dispenεing of fluids such aε found in many medical diagnoεtic instruments and devices, precision analytical pipetting, and like situationε where preσiεion manipulation of various volumes of fluid is needed, particularly small volumes of fluid. In addition, the inclusion of a second valve downstream of the syringe converts the syringe into a precision positive displacement pump. The syringe of the present invention is particularly useful with an automated analytical syεtem which iε capable of εimultaneouεly performing two or more aεεays on a plurality of test samples in a continuous and random access fashion, εuch aε the εyεtem described in greater detail herein. In particular, the automated immunoasεay analytical εyεtem apparatus of the invention can be viewed as a microproceεsor based system of integrated subaεεemblieε with different groups of asεayε being run through εeparate and changeable εoftware moduleε. The miσroproσeεεor baεed εystem uses robotic arm pipetters with two degreeε of freedom and bidirectional rotating carouεels to procesε sampleε. Critical asεay stepε εuch aε incύbationε, waεheε and εpecimen dilution are performed automatically by the inεtrument aε scheduled. REAGENT CAP AND PACK ACTUATOR Diagnostic syεtemε utilizing reagentε to analyze fluidε depend heavily on the correct concentration of theεe fluids or reagentε. Since evaporation can affect reagent concentration, it is important to minimize evaporation of these fluids from their storage containers. For example, reagent containers have been described which utilize self-sealing septum designε to help control evaporation after, for example, a εhipping εeal is broken, removal of reagents, and the like. However, such designε contribute to croεε-contamination or carryover of reagentε from one container to another with a pipette probe. In addition, manual operation of presently known container closure syεtemε or use of a septum cap can result in contamination and evaporation of costly reagents. According to the present invention, an apparatus and method for controlling evaporation of reagents are provided which facilitate the operation of multiple containers from an' evaporatively sealed condition to an open position for access of reagents from the containers by transfer pipette mechanisms of the syεtem. As described in greater detail below, the apparatus is capable of closing multiple containers to an evaporatively sealed condition employing opening and cloεing means. In particular, the reagent containers are opened and closed by the apparatus in a manner which minimizes the time the container remains in an open condition, thus minimizing or eliminating evaporation while, at the same time, maximizing accesεibility to the liquid reagent contained therein by a pipette probe or transfer mechanism. The syεtem methodology for opening and closing the cloεure and cap means accommodates variations in container evaporation differenceε and will open and close containers properly while maintaining an evaporative seal when not in use. As shown in Figures 34 and 35, an opening and closing station 464 is provided for opening and closing closure and cap means 454 of a reagent veεεel 450 to prevent contamination or carryover between different reagent containers by a common pipette probe while, at the same time, minimizing evaporation. Although closure syεtems having container cloεureε which remain open with no automatic cloεing means have been described, such cloεure εystems are not capable of opening and cloεing cloεure and cap means as described herein. For example, the opening and closing station 464 of the present invention is capable of opening the closure and cap means 454 to various positionε, such as, for example, an evaporatively sealed soft cloεure for routine day-to-day uεage of opening and closing, or an evaporatively sealed hard closure for periods of non-use of reagents or for handling of the reagent pack. According to the present invention, a reagent container or pack 30 (FIGS. 1 and 32) is moved below the opening and closing station 464 where the εtation openε a closure and cap means 454. The fluid in the container is withdrawn by a pipette probe, and the opening and closing εtation closeε the container to an evaporatively sealed condition. In one embodiment of the invention shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, a reagent pack 30 has a cover 31 which pivots between an open and closed position on a pin 37. The pin 37 can include biased spring means to facilitate movement of the cover 31 between opened and closed positionε. For example, εuch εpring meanε can be a hinge formed from a stretched material, such as stretched plastic, to provide the desired bias. The apparatus and method of the present invention is also capable of controlling the opening acceleration of the reagent container closure syεtems to reduce or prevent contamination between reagent containers, and to prevent the losε of reagentε by, for example, randomly εprayed or airborne liquid reagentε, typically in the form of dropletε, which may otherwise result from abrupt opening of the containers. The cover 31 extendε radially from the other side of the pin 37 forming a tab 33 as a lever arm for the cover 31. According to this embodiment, the εyεtem apparatuε compriεeε a linear actuator (not εhown) poεitioned at an opening and closing ' εtation (not εhown) on the front end carouεel 4. The linear actuator reciprocateε a plunger 35 having a notched lower end 35' for engaging the tab 33. When the linear actuator extendε the plunger 35 downwardly, itε notched lower end 35' engages the tab 33 to open the cover 31. When the actuator withdraws the plunger 35, its notched lower end 35' pullε the tab 33 up to cloεe the cap 31. According to a preferred embodiment (FIGS. 31-35), there iε εhown, in FIG. 31 a top view of a reagent pack 30 containing reagent σontainerε 450 having reagent container openingε 452 closed by cloεure and cap means 454. The reagent containers 450 are maintained within reagent pack walls 456 as well as an open bulk liquid container 460. The reagent pack walls. 456 give the reagent pack 30 a configuration which iε εuitable for inεertion into the reagent pack carousel 32 (FIG. 3) of the front end carousel 4 (FIG. 3). The reagent containers 450 and the open bulk liquid container 460 are maintaine within the reagent pack 30 by reagent pack container mounting and stabilization surfaces 458. The side sectional view of FIG. 32 is a section taken along section A-A of FIG. 31 and εhowε three positions of the closure and cap means 454. For example, the closure and cap means 454 is εhown in an open position 454' , preferably biased by spring means to a locked position to prevent closure of the cloεure and cap means 454 εuch aε by, for example, movement of the front end carouεel 4, and in an opened but not locked position 454", and closed position 454. It is to be understood that open positionε 454' and 454" provide - In¬ adequate access of a pipette probe to withdraw liquid reagents from a reagent container 450 through the container opening 452. In this regard, movement and positions of the closure and cap means 454 are not intended to be limited as shown, and other open positionε are contemplated provided that the reagent in a reagent container 450 is accessible by a pipette probe. The isometric view of FIG. 33 illustrates a reagent container 450, closure and cap means 431, contact surface 433 and reagent container opening 452. The closure and cap means 454 are shown in an open position exposing-a cap member 462 which fits inside the reagent container opening 452 and, together with a spaced-apart ring member 463, provides an evaporatively sealed reagent .container 450 when the closure and cap means 454 are i ' h a closed position as described above. It is to be understood that such evaporatively sealed closed position can either be a hard seal as deεcribed above, whereby the cap member 462 iε εecurely fixed to the opening 452 for extended periodε of non-use or handling of the reagent pack 30, or it can be a soft seal, whereby the cap member 462 is ajar, but neverthelesε in an evaporatively εealed poεition, againεt the opening 452 with no or minimal aεεiεtance from the ring member 463. An opening and cloεing εtation 464 iε εhown in a perεpective εide elevational view in FIG. 34, and a different perspective side elevational view of the opening and closing station is εhown in FIG. 35. The opening and cloεing εtation 464 haε a houεing 466 and a drive motor 468 mounted thereon. The houεing 466 haε a mounting means 470 for mounting and fixing the opening and closing εtation 464 above the reagent carouεel 32 (FIG. 3). The opening and closing station 464 σompriεeε opening pinε 472 which contact a tab portion 453 of the cloεure and cap means 454 in a downward motion to thereby bring the closure and cap means 454 to a desired open poεition aε εhown in FIG. 34. Rotational movement of the reagent carouεel 32 poεitionε the deεired reagent containerε 450 below the opening and cloεing εtation 464 for either opening of the cloεure and cap meanε 454, or for cloεing the cloεure and cap meanε 454 by the opening and cloεing εtation 464, as previously described. In operation, the reagent carouεel 32 rotateε to poεition the containerε 450 in FIG. 34 away from the opening pins 472 and under reagent pack cloεure activatorε 474 which are brought into frictional contact with the open cloεure and cap means 454 to thereby push εaid cloεure and cap meanε 454 from the εubεtantially vertical open poεition 454' to the open locked position 454" shown in FIG. 32, wherein the closure and cap meanε 454 are locked by internal spring meanε (not εhown) aε deεcribed above. For example, FIG. 34 illuεtrateε the cloεure and cap meanε 454 in an open position subεequent to contact of the tab 453 of the cloεure and cap means 454 by opening pins 472, whereby said closure and cap 454 pivot about pivot means 476 to open the closure and cap means 454 to a substantially vertical position as shown. The opening and cloεing εtation 464 further compriεeε reagent pack closure activator members 474 which are in the form of • three valve-shaped heads and which are in an inactive position while the opening pins 472 are pushed down and against the tab 453 of the closure and cap means 454 for opening the reagent containers 450. Alternatively, the reagent pack closure activator members 474 can be in the form of a single valve-shaped head, having dimensionε εimilar to the dimensions of the closure and cap means 31 (FIG. 30) or the closure and cap means 454 (FIG. 34). In order to close the reagent containerε 450, when in the open position 454' or 454" as shown in FIG. 34, the reagent container 450 iε poεitioned under the reagent pack cloεure actuator memberε 474 by rotational movement of the carouεel 32, whereby the cloεure and cap meanε 454 are brought into frictional contact with either partially lowered opening pinε 472, or partially lowered reagent pack cloεure actuator member 474, which drag againεt the open locked cloεure and cap meanε 454 to overcome the εpring meanε and return the cloεure and cap means 454 to a partially closed or soft seal position. Alternatively, the closure and cap means 454 can form a soft seal on the reagent containerε 450 by contact of the reagent pack cloεure actuator member 474 with the cloεure and cap means 454, or the actuator members 474 can be brought into a more firm contact with the soft closed closure and cap means 454 to force the cloεure and cap meanε into a hard closed position, or both. It iε to be underεtood that εuch εoft εeal and hard εeal can be εimilarly accompliεhed utilizing the opening pinε 472 without aεsiεtanσe from the reagent pack deεerve actuator members 474 whereby in all instanσeε the reagent container 450 will then be returned to- a cloεed evaporatively εealed condition. It iε to be underεtood that the cloεure and cap meanε 454 can be individual for each reagent container 450 aε shown in FIG. 33 or can be of the gang-type as shown in FIG. 34 and 35. In addition, the opening and closing εtation 464 can, for example, have three opening pins 472 and three reagent pack closure actuator members 474 which can ' function independently and operate for opening either individual reagent containers or, preferably, εimultaneouεly open all of the reagent containerε 450, whether the cloεure and cap meanε 454 are individual for each reagent container 450 or joined together in preεenting an expanded cloεure and cap meanε covering multiple reagent containerε 450 aε εhown in FIGS. 30 and 34. According to a preferred embodiment, the acceleration of the opening of the closure and cap means 454 iε controlled by the reagent pack " cloεure members 474 whereby the reagent pack cloεure members 474 contact the upper εurface of, and reciprocate in an upward direction -with, the closure and cap means 454 during the proceεε of opening the closure and cap means 454 as described above. When reciprocally contacting the upper surface of the closure and cap meanε 454, the reagent pack cloεure members 474 provide downward resistance onto the closure and cap means 454 to control the upward or opening acceleration thereof while, at the same time, allowing the closure and cap means 454 to open to the desired open poεition for access of liquid reagent in the reagent, container 450 by a pipette probe. It is to be understood that other variations of the closure and cap meanε 454 and operation of the opening the cloεing εtation 464 are contemplated without departing from the teachingε of the preεent invention. For example, εpring meanε can be aεsociated with the pivot means 476 of the closure and cap means 454 or with the hinge meanε 437 of the closure and cap meanε 431 (FIG. 33), whereby cloεing of the closure and cap means 454 or 431, respectively, can be accomplished without the as iεtance of the downward force of the opening pinε 472 or reagent pack actuator memberε 474. For example, the cloεure and cap meanε 454 or 431 can be εpring biaεed to the cloεed poεition, whereby the opening pinε 472 remain in contact with the tab 453 of the cloεure and cap means 454 or the tab 433 of the closure and cap means 431 subsequent to the opening operation as described above to maintain the closure and cap meanε 454 or 431 in an open poεition to allow removal of reagentε from a reagent container 450 with a pipette probe. One pipette haε been withdrawn from the reagent container 450, the opening pinε 472 move in an upward direction away from tabε 453 or 433 to thereby allow the closure and cap means 454 or 431 to return to their evaporatively sealed cloεed poεitionε. The εpring means can be in the form of a stretched material, εucn aε εtretched plaεtic, tenεion εprings, and the like, whereby the desired bias can be ascertained by one skilled in the art apprised of the foregoing considerations. As would be understood by one skilled in the art, εuch embodiment can be employed, for example, in an Abbott IMx ® analyzer or TDx ® analyzer wherein meanε for movement of a reagent pack mounted therein are not provided. In addition, a pipette probe tranεfer mechaniεm can either be located at a remote location or εtation from the open and cloεing εtation 464, thereby requiring movement of a reagent pack to εuch pipette probe transfer mechanism for access of reagents in a reagent container by the pipette probe or can be associated with the open and closing- station 464, whereby such movement or positioning of a reagent pack is not necesεary.* * Moreover, the opening and closing station 464 is not intended to be limited for use with the rotational movement of a carousel as described herein. For example, a reagent pack can be mounted or otherwise positioned on a non-concentrical or linear conveyor syεtem, whereby εuσh non=concentrical.system reciprocates with a reagent pack to facilitate the opening and closing of a cloεure and cap means as described herein. Similarly, the opening and closing station can be utilized in conjunction with carousels and non-concentrical conveyor εyεte ε which are not neceέεarily in the horizontal plane. The Kitting Center iε treated aε one pipette block. Carryover experimentε have εhown that a poεt waεh of at least about 2 ml is sufficient to clean the probe to a carryover level of 1 ppm or leεε when sample iε kitted firεt followed by waεh and pipetting of reagentε. Total wash following sample should be about 4 ml total wash before next kitting activity. Contamination of the reagent bottle following sample will come from the outside of the probe. This is reduced to insignificant levelε by waεh to waεte cup, e.g., 200 to 1,000 μl, followed by from between about 1 ml to about 2 ml waεh to the waεh cup. In order to inεure consistent, rapid resuεpenεion and continued mixing of reagents with minimal operator involvement, the -reagents are mixed automatically each time a new reagent pack is added to the reagent carousel, and periodically during instrument operation. This automated mixing can be accomplished by a back and forth motion of the reagent carousel with asymmetric pauseε and iε complete within approximately 1-2 minuteε. The carouεel acceleration, velocity, distance moved, and pause-aεymmetry are optimized to yield the most rapid reagent reεuεpenεion without foaming or bubble formation for the range of fill volumeε uεed on the inεtrument. Automated reagent mixing provideε the following benefitε. The operator need not manually mix (e. g. by inverεion or εhaking) reagentε which have been εtored prior to their placement on the instrument. This allows the reagentε to be loaded onto the instrument in less time and with leεε involvement of the operator. There iε lesε tendency for reagentε to foam or form bubbles with automatic mixing than with manual mixing such aε inverεion. Foam and bubble formationε are detrimental to inεtrument function and can negatively impact assay performance. Automated mixing insures that reagents are always mixed sufficiently and that they are mixed consiεtently. Oσcaεional automatic mixing- during instrument operation keeps reagentε in a consistent suspension, and makes it unnecessary for the operator to periodically remove reagent packs in order to mix the reagents. In εome circumstances, automated mixing can disεipate bubbleε preεent at the εtart of mixing. A detailed deεσription of kitting and process activitieε according to the invention are preεented later herein for FPIA proσedureε for a phenobarbital assay; and for MEIA procedures for a CEA asεay. TEST SAMPLE CONTAINER SEGMENT According to another embodiment, a test sample container segment assembly adapted to receive a plurality of test sample containerε of varying dimenεionε for uεe with an automated analytical inεtrument iε provided. The segment asεembly cooperates with a teεt εample carouεel of the automated analytical inεtrument to provide variability in teεt sample containers which can be processed by such automated analytical instrument. Accordingly, the test εample container segment assembly obviates the need to transfer test samples from an otherwise incompatible teεt εample container to a test εample container which is required for use with an analytical instrument. In particular, the teεt εample carouεel compriεeε a plurality of poεitions for receiving the teεt sample segments of the preεent invention. For example, the carouεel iε preferably adapted to receive six test sample segmentε, with each εegment containing receiving poεitionε for either ten or fifteen teεt εample containerε. The εegment can accommodate, for example, one or more εample cupε and primary tubeε, wherein the number of primary tube εizeε and dimenεionε will vary. The primary tubeε and sample cups may be mixed within the same sample segment. The different sample segments will support the primary tubes and εample cupε so that the aspiration of samples will be accomplished at subεtantially the εame height to provide the automated analytical εyεtem with a common level for a probe, which is utilized in combination with pipetting means, to provide sample transfer and kitting of reagents into a reaction vesεel on a reaction vessel carouεel. Accordingly, εince probe pipetting meanε are in demand in relationship to time and use, the test sample εegment assembly enables, for example, lesε travel and level εense time when such primary tubes and sample cups are utilized to thereby increase throughput of the syεtem. Preferably, each εample εegment includes an identifying number and code which is read by an instrument and aεsociated with εample εegmentε for kitting and proceεεing within the automated, random access analytical system instrument. Accordingly, the test sample carouεel, in combination with the teεt εample εegment aεεemblies, provide a maximum amount of acceεεibility for loading and unloading of sample containers, such as the primary tubes, sample cupε, and the like containers as described herein. The test sample container segment assembly 600 is shown in FIG. 36 in a perεpective view. It iε to be underεtood that teεt sample containerε contemplated according to the preεent invention include, but are not intended to be limited to, Vacutainer® tubeε, teεt tubeε, cuvettes, vialε, εample cupε and the like, all of which can be of varying εizes and dimensionε. The aεεembly haε a frame 601 and a handling meanε 603. The asεembly 600 haε a teεt εample container mounting εhelf 604 into which teεt εample containers can be inserted through container insertion openings 606. Once inserted into the container insertion opening 606, the containers are received and surrounded by liquid level sense sleeveε 608. However, inεertion openingε 606 of the aεεembly can adequately εupport and fix said test sample containers without use of sleeveε 608. The test εample container segment aεsembly 600 haε two curved dimenεionε which are in a parallel relationεhip and are equal to the radiuε of curvature of the teεt εample container carouεel. The outer curved portion 610 of the test sample container segment asεembly 600 and the inner curved portion 612, both being vertical and in relationεhip to the container mounting εhelf 604, preεent an aεεembly which is mateable with the test sample container .carousel. The test sample container carousel 28 has positioning and mounting pins which are receivable within pin receivers 614 and 616 of the test sample container εegment asεembly 600. Theεe pin receiving elementε allow an operator to properly poεition and mount the teεt εample container segment asεembly 600 into the teεt εample container carouεel 28. The teεt εample container carousel 28 has mounting pins 618 aε εhown in FIG. 38 which are received by the test sample container of asεembly 600 receiving εegmentε 614 and 616. Theεe receiving εegmentε 614 and 616 are shown in FIG. 37, which iε a bottom view of the teεt εample container εegment aεεembly of FIG. 36. A croεε εectional view in iεolation of the teεt εample container carouεel with a mounted test εample container segment aεsembly 600 mounted therein is εhown in FIG. 38. The view in FIG. 38 clearly illuεtrateε the adaptation of the teεt εample container segment assembly 600 to the test sample container carousel 28 providing an operator with the handling means 603 and alignment pins 618 for fitting into teεt εample container εegment assembly 600 receiving curved portions 610 and 612. A cross sectional view of a modified teεt sample cup 620 is shown with upper and lower skirt portions 624 and 622, respectively, in FIG. 39. Such modified test sample cup -520 can be utilized within the test sample container segment asεembly for preεenting to the aεεembly uniform outer dimenεion which fitε routinely into the teεt εample container εegment aεεembly 600, even though the interior of the test sample cup 620 is buried for variouε purpoεeε. A short teεt εample Vacutainer® tube εample aεεembly 626 iε εhown in perspective view in FIG. 40. The short test sample Vacutainer® tube segment asεembly 626 haε a frame 628 and a handling meanε 630. The aεεembly haε Vacutainer® tube mounting εhelf 632 in which Vacutainer® tube insertion opening 634 is provided for guiding and mounting the short test εample Vacutainer® tubeε into the εhort test sample Vacutainer® tube εegment aεsembly 626. A top croεε εectional view of the short test sample Vacutainer® tube εegment aεεembly iε εhown in FIG. 41; the view iε taken along line A-A of FIG. 40. Vacutainer® tube mounting εpring meanε 636 provide a holding meanε for the inεertable Vacutainer® tube elementε which are of a tubular or teεt tube configuration. In addition to the Vacutainer® tube mounting εpring means 636, Vacutainer® tube holding arms 637 are presented which further εtabilize and maintain the Vacutainer® tubeε in a εpecified poεition in relationεhip to the εhort teεt sample Vacutainer® tube segment assembly 626 so that when the asεembly iε inserted into the test sample carousel 28, the test sample Vacutainer® tubeε will not only be poεitioned aε to a uniform height, ' but will alεo be positioned at a specific location within the carousel and mounted short test εample Vacutainer® tube εegment aεεembly 626. A bottom view of the εhort teεt εample Vacutainer® tube εegment aεεembly of FIG. 40 iε εhown in FIG. 42. Teεt εample carouεel 28 mounting pin receiving elementε 642 and 644 provide aεεembly mounting poεitioning guideε within the teεt sample carouεel 28. In FIG. 43 and 44 teεt εample cup adaptor εleeveε of variouε lengthε are presented. In FIG. 43, a crosε εectional view of a long teεt εample cup adaptor εleeve 649 iε εhown. In FIG. 44, a crosε εectional view of a short teεt εample cup iε εhown. FIGS. 43 and 44 allow the εample cupε of FIG. 39 to be uεed in Vacutainer® tube εegmentε. The εample acquiεition carousel utilized in the present instrument preferably has, for example, six positions or sections for mounting test sample container segment assemblies as illustrated in FIGS. 36 and 40. The test sample segment assemblies are interchangeable, as the operator desires, with positioning pins either on the segmentε or on the carouεel with appropriate receiving meanε enεuring proper poεitioning of the εegmentε to the carouεel. Accordingly, εuch interchangeable εegmentε allow the acquiεition of a variety of test sample containers which can reside on the carouεel at any given point in time. It iε to be underεtood, of courεe, that the number of εample acquiεition carouεel positions or sections may vary, and such number will depend upon the size of each portion or section and dimenεions of the carouεel. According to the present invention, different types of segment assemblies can be placed in the test sample carousel such as, for example, (1) test sample cup segments which can be used in conjunction with the instrument sample cup 620, wherein the segment can hold up to fifteen of εuch teεt εample cupε; (2) large Vacutainer® tube segments, which can be uεed with Vacutainer® tubeε from about 0.400 to about 0.650 incheε in diameter and about 3.000 to 4.000 inches in length. Such large Vacutainer ® tubes can be positioned in the segments to accommodate up to ten Vacutainer® tubeε; and (3) ε all Vacutainer® tubeε, which can be utilized with the εhort test Vacutainer® sample tube segment assembly of FIG. 40, can accommodate Vacutainer® tubes of about 0.400 to about 0.650 inches in diameter and about 2.000 to 3.000 inches in length, with about ten positions to accommodate up to ten Vacutainer® tubes. Sample container adapters are also available which allow εample cup containers to be placed in a Vacutainer® tube segment, particularly for sample cups 620. Such adapters .allow sample containers to be used when a minimum number of sample containers are needed and space for a sample container is not available. Level sensing of fluid in any of the test sample container in the sample εegmentε can be accompliεhed aε deεcribed in detail above. In addition, bar code identification iε provided on the εegment asεemblieε and adaptor εleeveε. Such bar code identifications are used to identify the segment type and the substitution of, for example, an adaptor sleeve, as well aε, of course, identifying the teεt sample, itself. In one embodiment, an operator can load empty teεt εample cupε 620 into a teεt εample εegment and pipette teεt samples into the sample cups 620. The operator may choose to configure the test εamples according to a predetermined load list generated via a data entry proceεε. Vacutainer® tube adaptor εleeves and other tubes can, of course, be used in place of a sample cup 620 in the appropriate εegment. The operator will then place the test εample εegment on the teεt εample carousel and indicate to the self-contained scheduling and computer εyεtem that further teεt εamples are to be procesεed. The teεt εample carousel will scan all segmentε at the appropriate time in order to track all onboard teεt εamples. The instrument will continue, in sequence, to process test εamples unlesε a "stat" test is ordered. When a "εtat" teεt is ordered, the instrument will scan all segmentε until it finds the one which contains the "stat" test sample. When the stat kitting cycle has completed, the front end carousel will return to a previous sequence. The operator may choose to brace the instrument into a hold phase during loading and unloading of teεt εample segment asεemblieε. The kitting proceεε will be εuεpended after the next kitting cycle. Once loading and unloading iε complete, a εecond inεtruction will cauεe the kitting proceεε to reεume. The εtatuε of onboard teεt samples will be subject to audit through a data entry screen of the instrument. With such audit, the operator will know which εegment aεsemblies are completed and may be removed. Single teεt εamples may be placed into a segment assembly which is residing on the test εample carouεel. REACTION VESSEL AND LOADER Unit doεe diεposable reaction vessels play an important role in automated, continuous and random accesε analytical εyεtemε which are. capable of εimultaneouεly performing at leaεt two different forms of asεayε on a..* plurality of teεt εamples in a continuous and random access fashion, with generally one reaction vesεel required for each aεεay, wherein multiple reaction vessels are utilized by εuch εyεtems. Means for handling and loading εuch reaction vessels in multiple units into the reaction vesεel carouεel iε particularly uεeful for the uniform and continuouε operation of the system by the operator. Referring now to FIGS. 45A-C in combination, there is illustrated a reaction vesεel 34, constructed in accordance with the principles of the present invention. The reaction vesεel 34 haε a top εurface 141 with side edges 143 and 145. The side edges 143 and 145 of the reaction vesεel ' 34 taper at one end to a rounded profile 147. At the oppoεite end of the top 141, a vertical tab 151 extendε above the top .surface 141. At the end of the top 141 near the rounded profile 147 iε a holding means 149 extending below the top 141 for εecuring the cuvette 140 to the reaction veεεel 34. The holding meanε 149 iε typically a press fit aperture securing the cuvette 140 below the top 141. Extending through, and below, the top 141 are wells 142, 144, 146, 148, 150, 152, and 154. The wells 142, 144, 146, 148, 150, 152 and 154 can be " selected for a specific size, location, and shape ■ neσeεεary for containing the reagents, sampleε, bufferε and/or dilution liquidε πeceεεary for the apparatuε operation. At the bottom of well 154 iε a reaction veεεel tab 153 for uεe in movement of the reaction veεεel 34 by the tranεfer εtation aε explained above. Referring now to FIG. 46, there is shown an isometric view of the reaction veεεel loading εtrip 175, in section, having two reaction vessels 34 mounted thereon, illustrating the continuous εtrip upper portion handling ledge εegmentε 177 which are εeparated by ledge σut-outε 179. Each ledge εegment 177 coincides with a reaction vesεel mounting meanε 182, which meanε 182 are on a lower portion of the continuous strip wall 181. The reaction vesεel mounting meanε 182 includeε flexible leg portionε 183 having double fin εetε 187 on each leg portion 183 for mounting of each reaction vesεel 34. The double fin sets 187 project perpendicularly from the plane of the strip continuous wall 181 and leg portionε 183. The leg portionε 183 are flexible and in combination with the double fin εets 187 allow for firm holding of the reaction vesεelε 34 when mounted on the reaction veεsel loading device strip 175 and yet release the reaction vesεelε 34 when inεerted into the reaction veεεel carousel. Referring now to FIG. 47, there is εhown a top view of the reaction veεεel loading device εtrip 175 having ten reacti-on vesselε 34 mounted thereon. The reaction vesselε 34 are mounted on the reaction vessel holding device strip 175 through assertion of the reaction vesεel mounting meanε 182 into well 152. The reaction veεεel holding device εtrip iε utilized for loading multiple reaction veεεelε at one time into the reaction veεsel carousel by arcing the strip continuous wall 181 to correspond to the radius of curvature of the reaction vesεel carousel. In the embodiment illustrated, ten reaction veεεelε 34 are εhown attached to one continuouε strip wall 181; however, the reaction vesεel loading device εtrip 175 can be expanded in length to accommodate more than ten reaction veεεels or lesε than ten reaction veεεelε can be mounted on the εame length εtrip or reduced εtrip lengthε. Referring now to FIGS. 46 and 47 in combination the reaction veεεel loading device 175 iε comprised of a semi-rigid plastic εtrip which holdε a plurality of reaction veεεelε 34 at one time for loading the reaction veεεelε 34 onto the reaction veεεel carouεel. An operator would bend the loading device 175 into an arc which matches the radius of the carousel. Then the plurality of reaction vesεels 34 mounted on the loading device 175 are inserted into their respective -slotε on the carouεel. The multiple reaction veεεels 34 are snapped into place on the carousel and then the reagent vesεel loading device 175 is removed for reuse or for discarding. Referring now to FIG. 48, there is shown an isometric view of an alternate reaction vesεel loading device 451, in εection, having two reaction veεεels 34 mounted thereon. The loading device 451 has a planar surface 453. Extending below the receεεed planar surface 453 are a plurality of recesεed planar εurfaces 455 which have a shape generally conforming to the shape top surface 141 of the reaction veεεelε 34. Extending below the receεεed planar εurfaceε 455 are cuvette plugε 459 which are sized and located for insertion into the cuvette 140 of the reaction vessel 140. Also extending below the recesεed planar εurfaceε 455 are well plugε 457 which are εized and located for inεertion into one of the wells 142, 144, 146, 148, 150, 152, or 154 of the reaction vesεelε 34. The well plug 457 and cuvette plug 459 have a diminiεhing εize, or taper, aε the plugε progress downward from the recessed planar surfaceε 455, thereby providing eaεe of inεertion or removal of the well and cuvette 140 of the reaction veεεel 34. Extending upward around the outer parameter of the planar εurface 453 iε a continuouε elevated rim 461. On the upper edge of the elevated rim 461 is a top surface 462 which is substantially flat and parallel to the planar surface 453. At either end of the loading device 451 are handling fins 465 which are parallel to, and extend upward from, the elevated rim 461. Referring now to FIG. 49, there is shown a top view of the alternate reaction vesεel loading device 451 of FIG. 48 having ten (10) receεεed planar surfaces 455 for holding ten (10) reaction vesεelε 34. Although the embodiment illuεtrated holdε ten (10) of the reaction vesselε 34, the loading device 451 can be configured to have any number of recessed planar εurfaceε 455 for holding any number of reaction veεεelε 34. The well plug 457 and the cuvette plug 459 of the loading device 451 inεert into, and engage, the well 152 and the cuvette 140, respectively, thereby εecuring the reaction veεεel 34 to the loading device 451. Although the loading device 451 εecureε the reaction vesselε 34 by engaging the well 152 and the cuvette 140, the loading device could secure the reaction vesεel 34 by engaging εingly or in combination any number of the wellε 142, 144, 146, 148, 150, 152, and 154 and the cuvette 140. Referring now to FIGS. 48 and 49 in combination, the loading device 451 is preferably manufactured from a εemi-ridged plaεtic and iε generally formed in a shape corresponding to the radius of curvature of the reaction vesεel carouεel. The receεεed planar surfaces 455 are spaced to .correspond to the locations for mounting the reaction vesεelε 34 on the reaction veεεel carouεel. The reaction veεεelε 34 are loaded onto the loading device 451 by inεertion of the well plug 457 and the cuvette plug 459 into the correεponding well 152 and cuvette 140 of the reaction veεεel 34. In thiε manner, the receεεed planar εurfaceε 455 provide a cover for the reaction vessels. Also, the well plug 457 and cuvette plug 459 provide a positive seal for the well 152 and the cuvette 140. Still referring to FIGS. 48 and 49 in combination, the loading device 451 with reaction vesεelε 34 thereon iε poεitioned on the reaction veεεel carouεel with the location of the reaction vesselε 34 on the loading device 34 correεponding to the locationε on the reaction vessel carousel for the reaction vessels 34. An operator iε not required to use extraordinary care in εhaping the loading device 451 εince the loading device 451 iε preεhaped to fit the dimensions of the reaction vesεel carousel. In thiε regard, the reaction veεsel loading device is a "drop in" type of loading device for reaction vesεelε 34. Once the reaction vessels 34 on the loading device 451 are aligned, the reaction vessels 34 are snapped into place on the reaction vessel carousel using the handling fins 465 and elevated rim 461 of the loading device 451. In this manner, a plurality of reaction vesselε 34 can be loaded on the reaction veεεel carouεel at one time εaving the operator time over a method of individually loading the reaction veεεels 34 into the reaction vesεel carouεel. Referring εtill to FIGS. 48 and 49 in combination, once the reaction veεsels 34 are loaded into the reaction veεεel carousel, the loading device 451 can be left in place to provide a cover and seal for the reaction veεselε, 34 until uεed aε deεcribed herein. Removal of the loading device 451 from the reaction veεεelε 34 iε then accomplished by pulling upward on the loading device, utilizing, for example the handling finε 465 or the elevated rim 461. Removal of the loading device 451 doeε not diεlodge the reaction vesselε 34 from the reaction vesεel carousel because the holding force of the well plug 457 and cuvette plug 459 to the reaction vesεelε 34 iε leεε than the reaction veεεel carouεel holding force on the reaction veεεelε 34. Thiε reduced force iε due in part to the tapered profile of the well plug 457 and the cuvette plug 458, which also eases the insertion of the reaction vessels 34 onto the loading device 451. ENVIRONMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL" A controlled environment zone is necesεary for incubation and chemical reactionε within automated continuouε and random acceεε analytical εyεtemε. Temperature control is maintained in the controlled environment zone for purposeε of controlling the temperature -of diεposables, chemicals, tubing, me-chanisms and the like within the incubation and reaction zone which is optimum to the appropriate chemical reactions. Temperature control iε achieved utilizing air flow and air temperature aε the thermal dynamic working fluid. Although air or gaεeε do not transfer heat as rapidly as a liquid bath, air does not have the asεociated problemε of leakage, evaporation or contamination. The controlled environment zone containε carouεelε carrying chemiεtries of different reagents and volumes thus requiring an unusual temperature control approach of forcing the heated air to negotiate a pathway with a εubεtantial preεεure drop immediately upεtream of the process carouεel. The preεεure drop of the pathway iε higher than the preεεure drop the air experienσeε aε it paεεeε under the carouεel, whether the carouεel iε fully loaded or not. Thuε, the heated air diεtributeε itεelf evenly about the carouεel rather than preferentially funneling itself into a gap which may exit at the empty position of the carousel. " Air flow control within the controlled environment provides for minimal air flow above the top surfaces of the carouselε. Slow-moving air above liquid surfaces exposed by the open containers on the top portions cause leεε evaporation than air moving rapidly. However, total air flow is relatively high within the controlled environment zone and air flow along the carousel under sideε can be a combination of turbulent and laminar flow. A reaεonably high turnover rate and air flow is necesεary to minimize temperature variation. Referring now to FIG. 50, there iε shown a εσhe atic view illuεtrating the environmental airflow and temperature control εyεtem conεtructed in accordance with the principleε of the preεent invention. Temperature control, for reaction and incubation zoneε of a continuous analytical system, iε • 1 55- achieved utilizing heated air flow to control a carousel 19 of the controlled environment zone 18, which includes, of principle importance, a process carousel 46. Air flow 202 iε motivated by a fan element 210 and enterε through an air inlet 205 including an appropriate air filter εyεtem. The air flow 202 is forced past an air heater element 208 and through conduit means embodied in the base plate of the instrument. As the air emerges from the ducting, the air is directed toward the underside of the carousel 46 which is the carousel environment zone 19 and contains the sampleε to be analyzed, the neceεsary reagents, and the disposables used in the procesεes. As the heated air pasεeε through the carouεel environment zone 19, itε temperature iε εampled by a εensor 212. The sensor 212 output is monitored by a controller and when the controller determines that the εyεtem requireε additional amountε of heat, the controller energizeε a solid state relay which applies electrical power to the heating element 208. Still referring to FIG. 50, it can be seen that after leaving the carousel environment zone 19 air is allowed to circulate within the controlled environment zone 18. An air exhaust conduit 206 allows air to exit the controlled environment zone 18 in a controlled manner through multiple openings. While fan element 210 forces the heated air throughout the εyεtem, ambient air iε introduced through air inlet 207 downεtream from the moεt critical areaε of temperature control within the controlled environment zone 18 in order to provide cooling for fluidicε of the εystem through provision of cooling fluid to the heater asεembly 501 which are utilized in the fluidicε system. This introduction of ambient air through air inlet 207 is near the air exhaust 206 conduit and the " variouε outlets which are in communication with the controlled environmental zone and the air exhaust conduit 206. Referring s ill to FIG. 50, the controlled environment zone 18 is kept at a desired temperature by heating air to the correct temperature and applying air in large amounts to the most critical areas of the zone, such as the carousel environment zone 19. Heat is transferred by convection to the critical areas by using air which is generally experiencing turbulent flow, thus in this manner, critical areaε may be brought to temperature aε rapidly aε poεεible. The lesε critical areaε are downεtream and are heated under leεε forceful conditionε, i. e. slow moving air flow. In addition to having turbulent flow in the critical areaε, the total air flow iε relatively high within the controlled environment zone 18 with the air being completely expelled. Potential problemε which could occur in dealing with fully loaded carouεelε versus partially loaded carouεelε iε εolved by forcing the heated air to negotiate a pathway with a large preεεure drop immediately upεtream of the carousel. The pressure drop of the pathway is higher than the preεεure drop the air experiences as it pasεeε under the carousel, whether the carousel is fully loaded or not. Thus, the air distributes itself evenly about the carousel rather than preferentially funneling into a gap which may exist at the empty positionε on the carousel. Both FPIA and MEIA procedures utilize the system apparatus -commonly through and including the process carousel 46. Referring now to FIG. 51, there is shown a cross- sectional view of the procesε carouεel 46 conεtructed in accordance with the principleε of the present invention. The carousel 46 holds a plurality of reaction vesεelε 34. The lower portion of the reaction vesselε 34 are diεpoεed within the σarouεel environment zone 19 of the controlled environment zone 18. The carouεel 46 includeε reaction veεεel top zoneε 47 which are open to the controlled environment zone 18. At the bottom of the reaction vesεel top zoneε 47, the carouεel 46 and the reaction veεεelε 34 subεtantially seal off the top zoneε 47 from communicating with carouεel environment zone 19. Still referring to FIG. 51, it can be seen that the walls of the reaction veεεel top zoneε 47 will iεolate the air above the reaction veεselε 34 from.the movement of the air flow 202 in the controlled environment zone 18. Becauεe the air in the reaction veεεel top zoneε 47 iε not directly εubjected to the air flow 202, there will be leεε movement of the air directly over the open containers of the reaction vesselε 34, thereby reducing the amount of evaporation from the reaction veεεels 34. Sealing the top zones 47 from the carousel environment zone 19 allows air flow 202 to pasε over he underside of the reaction vessels 34 without disturbing the air directly over the reaction vesεelε 34, thereby transferring heat to, and from, the -reaction vesselε without increaεing evaporation of the fluidε in the reaction veεεelε 34. Referring now to FIGS. 52-54 in combination, there is shown the heater asεembly 501 from FIG. 50. The heater asεembly generally compriεeε a heater block or body 502 having therein a pair of heater elementε 505a- b, and a coiled liquid tubing 521 between the heater elementε 505a-b. The heater body 502 iε constructed of, for example, a metal εuch aε aluminum, εilver, copper, or the like, or any other εuitable thermoconductive material known in the art, with the various electrical terminals for an electrical reεiεtive heater syεtem, aε well aε εenεing and control elements for controlling preciεion temperature of the heater aεεembly for purpoεeε of preσiεion temperature control heat exchange with liquidε which flow through the heater aεsembly and maintained at specific temperatures. Mounting means 516 and 518 are shown as well as a ground pin 519 imbedded in the metal block 502. Still referring to FIGS. 52-54 in combination, liquid enters the coiled liquid tubing 521 through a liquid inlet 513. After pasεing through the coiled liquid tubing 521, the liquid leaves the heater asεembly through a liquid outlet 515 for depoεit into the MEIA cartridge 68 (not εhown). A teflon εleeve 517 iε εeσured to the outεide of the liquid outlet 515 to prevent the accumulation of liquid that might cling to the liquid outlet 515. The heater elementε 505a-b are poεitioned within the heater body 502 on oppoεite sides of the coiled liquid tubing 521. Heater electrical posts 504 and 506 provide controlled amounts of energy to the reεiεtance heater elements 505a-b. A thermistor 508 is poεitioned in the heater body 502 so that it iε centrally located with respect to the heater elements 505a-b and the coiled liquid tubing 521. The thermistor 508 provides an electrical reεiεtor whoεe resistance varies sharply or in a precise manner with temperature. The thermiεtor 508 cooperates _with a thermostatic connection 509 and a backup thermoεtatic connection 511 to power the heater elementε 505a-b and preciεely control the temperature of the heater aεεembly 501 aε well aε any liquidε contained therein or passing through. Referring still to FIGS. 52-54 in combination, the heater asεembly 501 can be εized to accommodate increased or decreased liquid volume capacity/ as well as heating means for such increaεed or decreaεed liquid capacities. The positioning of the heater assembly 501 immediately above, the use point avoids significant temperature change during the transfer from the heater asεembly 501 to the receiving materials. Temperature controls of the liquids within the heater aεεembly are controlled from between about ± 1.0'C and about ± * C of the required liquid temperature. Poεitioning pf the heater assembly 501 in relationship to the receiving means, for example, an MEIA cartridge, allows for about 3/8 inch or less of an air gap transfer from the tip of the liquid outlet 515 to the point of deposition of a liquid onto the cartridge, whereby the liquid is deposited with little or no temperature change thereof. MEIA CARTRIDGE. FEEDER. AND CARTON Referring now to FIG. 55, there iε εhown an MEIA cartridge 68 conεtructed in accordance with the principles of the present invention. The MEI A cartridge iε generally a cylindrical εhape containing a support matrix material 222 therein. In the top of the MEIA cartridge 68 is a funnel throat 216 which tapers down into a cartridge opening 218. The cartridge opening 218 allows access to the support matrix material 222 contained therein. The bottom of the MEIA cartridge 68 is flat and has no funnel throat or opening. Referring now to FIG. 56, there is shown a cartridge feeder apparatus 500 which will feed MEIA cartridges 68 singly, upright, and on-demand from a hopper 590 into a trap door 700. The cartridge hopper 590 contains a plurality of MEIA cartridges 68 which are positioned horizontally and laterally in the cartridge hopper 590 with the cartridge opening 218 facing either direction. The cartridge hopper 590 is removably attached to a bridge 510 that is a stationary portion of the cartridge feeder apparatuε 500. The bridge 510 haε a bridge throat 514 which accepts the MEIA cartridgeε 68 from the hopper 590 and allowε thoεe cartridgeε to paεε through the cartridge feeder apparatuε 500. The bridge 510 alεo has guide rods 512a-b, upon which a shuttle 520 iε slidably mounted. Referring still to FIG. 56, a linear motor 530 moves the shuttle 520 forward and backward on the guide rodε 512a-b of the bridge 510. The shuttle 520 has a shuttle throat 522 for receiving MEIA σartridgeε 68 from the bridge throat 514 when the εhuttle 520 iε in a home poεition. The linear motor 530 then εlideε the εhuttle 520 to a drop position. As the linear motor 530 slideε the εhuttle 520 from the home poεition, the cup pinε 550a-b graεp the MEIA cartridge 68. When the εhuttle 520 reaches the drop position, the cup pins 550a-b release the MEIA cartridge 68 upright into a chute 560. Still referring to FIG. 56, the chute 560 has a tapered inner profile which assiεts in orienting the MEIA cartridge 68 in an upright position as the MEIA cartridge 68 drops into the trap door 700. The chute 560 is rotatably mounted to the cartridge feeder apparatus 500. A spring 562 helps hold the chute 560 in position for operation of the cartridge feeder apparatus 500. A dump lever 564 connects to the chute 560, and when presεed rotateε the chute 560 against the force of the spring 562. In this manner, any MEIA cartridge 68 which lodges in the chute 560 can be cleared by pressing the dump lever 564, which rotates the chute 560 and dumps the MEIA cartridge 68. After the MEIA cartridge 68 has been dumped, the dump lever 564 is released and the spring 562 returns the chute 560 to its normal operational position. Referring εtill to FIG. 56, it can be εeen that mounted to the εhuttle 520 are puεherε 540a-b. The puεherε 540a-b paεε through an opening in the cartridge hopper 590 and contact the MEIA cartridgeε 68 in order to prevent the MEIA cartridgeε 68 from blocking the paεεage through the bridge throat 514 of the cartridge feeder apparatuε 500. In the home poεition of the shuttle 520, the pusher 540a pasεeε through an opening in the hopper 590 and alignε the MEIA cartridges 68 above the bridge throat 514. In the drop position of the shuttle 520, the pusher 540b pasεeε through an opposing opening -in the cartridge hopper 590 and alεo alignε the MEIA cartridges 68 for passage through the bridge throat 514. Referring now to FIG. 57, there is shown the cup pins 550a-b from FIG. 56. The cup pins 550a-b have a center profile 552a-b which extends outward and has a contour matching the funnel throat 216 of the MEIA cartridgeε 68. The center profile 552a-b doeε not have εufficient height to extend past the funnel throat 216 and come in contact with the cartridge opening 218 or the εupport matrix material 222 of the cartridge 68. The cup pinε 550a-b alεo have an outer lip 554a-b which extendε circumferentially around the center profile 552a-b. The outer lip 554a-b haε a inner diameter εufficient for allowing the MEIA cartridge 68 to fit within the outer lip 554a-b. Alεo, the outer lip 554a- b doeε not extend beyond the center εection 552a-b. Referring now to FIGS. 56 and 57 in combination, it can be εeen how the cartridge feeder apparatuε 500 can feed cartridgeε εingly in an upright poεition to a trap door 700. Aε previouεly mentioned, the MEIA cartridgeε 68 paεε from the bridge throat 514 to the shuttle throat 522 when the shuttle 520 is in the home position. As the shuttle progresεeε from the home position, the cup pins 550a-b cloεe in on the MEIA cartridge 68. When the cup pins 550a-b close in on the cartridge 68, the center profile 552a-b of the cup pin 550a-b facing the cartridge opening 218 will engage and fit within the funnel throat 216 of the cartridge 68. In this position, the center profile 552a-b of the cup pin 550a-b facing the cartridge opening 218 will engage the funnel throat 216 and will also surround the outside of the MEIA cartridge 68 with the outer lip 554a-b. The bottom of the MEIA cartridge 68 has no reσesε for the center profile 552a-b of the cup pin 550a-b to fit into. Aε a result, the outer lip 554a-b of the cup pin 550 engaging the bottom of the cartridge 68 will not surround the bottom of the cartridge 68 with the outer lip 554a-b. Referring still to FIGS. 56, and 57 in combination, as the εhuttle 520 approacheε the drop position, the cup pins 550a-b begin to separate for dropping the cartridge 68 into the chute 560. When the cup pins 550a-b begin to separate, gravity will pull the cartridge 68 downward. Becauεe the cup pinε 550a-b engaging the bottom of cartridge 68 neither extends into a funnel throat, nor surrounds the cartridge 68 with an outer lip, the bottom of the cartridge 68 will be the first portion of the cartridge 68 to begin to drop toward the chute 560. As the cup pins 550a-b continue to separate, the center profile 552a-b and outer lip 554a-b of the cup pins 550a-b engaging the top of the cartridge 68 will continue to engage the top portion of the cartridge 68 while the bottom portion of the cartridge 68 is dropping due to gravitational forces. Once the cup pins 550a-b have separated by sufficient distance, the funnel throat 216 of the cartridge 68 will disengage from the center profile 552a-b, and the outer lip 554a-b of the cup pins 550a-b engaging the top portion of the cartridge 68 will disengage, allowing the cartridge 68 to fall in an upright manner through the chute 560. It can be εeen from FIG. 18, that the deεign of the cup pinε 550a-b will drop the cartridge 68 in an upright position regardlesε of whether the cartridge 68 iε inverted or not in the cup pinε 550a-b. In thiε manner, MEIA cartridgeε 68 are diεpensed on demand, singly, and in an upright position, from the hopper 590 through the cartridge feeder apparatuε 500 into a trap door 700. Referring back to FIG. 56, the trap door 700 haε a trap door body 710 with a cartridge paεsage 712, and a εemicircular door 720 with a cartridge height adjuεtor 722. The MEIA cartridge 68 dropped by the cartridge feeder apparatuε 500, fallε into the cartridge passage. Initially, the semicircular door 720 blocks the cartridge passage 712. When the carousel under the trap door 700 is positioned to receive the cartridge 68, the semicircular door 720 rotates to a position that does not block the cartridge passage 712 and allows the cartridge to paεε through to the carouεel. After the cartridge 68 has pasεed through the cartridge paεsage 712, the εemicircular door 720 continueε to rotate until the cartridge height adjuεter 722 preεεeε the cartridge into the carouεel to a height εufficient for accurate teεting at a later time. Referring now to FIG. 58, there iε εhown a εide croεs εectional. view of a cartridge hopper 590 with a cartridge carton 480 poεitioned for unloading cartridgeε 68 into the cartridge hopper 590. The lower portion of the cartridge hopper 590 is tapered to a hopper release opening 486. The upper portion of the cartridge hopper 590 is large enough to act as a reεervoir for the cartridgeε 68 and haε two unloading roller pinε 484. The cartridge carton 480 iε εhown reεting on unloading roller pinε 484. The cartridge carton 480 iε alεo εhown in phantom at a maximum open unloading poεition 481, again reεting and being guided by the roller pinε 484. Referring now to FIGS. 59A, 59B, and 60 in combination, there is shown the cartridge carton 480 from FIG. 58. The cartridge carton 480 has break open or tab opening 482 for ease of opening and unloading in combination with the roller pins 484. Perforations 821 in the cartridge- *■ cartons 480 extend from the tab opening 482, up sideε 839a-b of the cartridge cartons 480, and to a top 860 of the cartridge carton 480. The top 860 of the cartridge carton 480 has a hinge meanε 880 which connects the two perforations 821. The cartridge carton 480 can be designed to contain any number of cartridges; however, a carton capacity of about 100 is εuitable for operation within the environments of the cartridge hopper 590 and the roller pins 484 locations. The cartridges 68 are loaded in the cartridge carton 480 in a lateral orientation with the cartridge opening 218 facing either direction. Referring now to FIGS. 58, 59A, 59B, and 60 in combination, it can be seen how the cartridges 68 in the cartridge carton 480 are loaded into the cartridge hopper 590. To load the cartridge hopper 590, the tab opening 482 iε removed from the cartridge carton 480. The cartridge carton 480 iε then poεitioned on the roller pins 484 with the hinge means 880 facing upward. A slight downward force on the hinge means 880 of the cartridge carton 480 will separate the perforations 821 and open the cartridge carton 480 to the maximum open position 481 aε εhown in phantom. The cartridges 68 will then be deposited in the cartridge hopper 680 in the correct laterally horizontal position.* Some of the cartridges 658 will be deposited in an inverted orientation, however, the cartridge feeder assembly 500 will still be able to drop those inverted cartridges in an upright position into the feeder means because of the design of- the cup pinε 550a-b. Referring now to FIG. 61, there iε εhown an iεometric view of an alternate embodiment of a εtand alone hopper 488 which iε detachable from the remainder of the feed meanε, the εtand alone hopper 488 being easily .-detached for loading purposes. The hopper presents cartridge availability indication 494 through a transparent wall portion for operator inspection. The εtand alone hopper haε an attached εtand alone base or platform 492 for supporting the hopper during loading of multiple cartridges from a carton 480 as εhown in FIGS. 59A, 59B, and 60, utilizing the. roller pins 484. OPTICS CONTROL SYSTEM The present invention includes an optics control syεtem εhown generally at 248 in FIG. 64 which simultaneously and continuously manages in real time an optical system for the FPIA shown generally at 284 in FIG. 62 (the "FPIA optics system") and an optical system for the MEIA shown generally at 361 in FIG. 63 (the "MEIA optics syεtem"), both of which contain opticε uεed in Abbott' ε IMx ® and TDx® analyzerε which are well known in the art. The heart of the opticε control syεtem 248 is an optical signal proσesεor 254 ("OSP") which is dedicated to the optics syεtems 284, 361 and communicates with the central processor 255 over a bidirectional bus 257. The scheduler 256 running on the central processor 255 sends macro- commands to the OSP 254 which interprets them and generates micro-commands for controlling the FPIA optics εyεtem 284 and the MEIA opticε εyεtem 361. Although the scheduler 256 haε a priori knowledge of what both opticε εyεtemε 284, 361 will read becauεe of itε knowledge of the reagentε, the OSP 254 collectε data from both and tranεmitε it back to the central processor 255 which continues operating the random acceεε analytical εyεtem in real time. The OSP 254 has no such prior knowledge, but is esεential for controlling, collecting and transmitting the large volume of data in real time. To better understand how the optics control syεtem 248 manageε the FPIA and MEIA opticε εyεtemε 284 and 361, both are defined more εpecifically aε followε. Referring to FIG. 62, the light source for the FPIA optics syεtem 284 iε a tungsten halogen lamp 286 which provides a source of light energy for illuminating the FPIA reaction mixture in the cuvette .140 along an incident path I. The lamp 286 focuεeε the light through an aperture 290, a heat reflector 288, and heat abεorber 292 to a piano convex lens 293 which collimates the light through an excitation filter 294 at a frequency of 485 nm represented by the fine short lines f ] t i. e. , the incident frequency. The collimated beam of light is split by a beamsplitter 296, the reflected portion being focused by a piano convex lens 310 to a reference detector 312, a photodiode, and the transmitted portion propagating through a trans iεεive liquid crystal 298 and focuεed by another piano concave lenε 301 through the FPIA reaction mixture in the cuvette 140 which fluoreεceε at a higher frequency of 535 nm repreεented by the darker εhort lineε f e , i. e. , the emitted frequency. A piano convex lenε 306 collimateε the light emitted from the fluoreεcing mixture along an emitted path E through an emission filter 302 and a polarizer 304 to another piano convex lens 306 which focuseε the emitted light on a photo multiplier tube ("PMT" ) 308. Power iε εupplied to the lamp 286 and the PMT 308 via inputs 287 and 308(a), respectively, and control εignalε are εent to the liquid cryεtal 298 via an output 299 which controls the state of the liquid cryεtal 298 to be either vertically or horizontally polarized. The reference detector 312 provides an output 313 to the optical control εyεtem 248 which controlε the input 287 to the lamp 286. The PMT 308 alεo provideε an output 308(b) to the optical control system 248 which transmits data from the PMT 308 to the central procesεor 255. Referring to FIG. 63, the light source for the MEIA optics syεtem 361 is a mercury vapor lamp 364 which provides a εource of light energy for illuminating the contentε of the MEIA cartridge 68 along an incident path shown by the double-lined arrows. The light from the lamp 364 illuminateε an excitation filter 362 which tranεmitε the light at a frequency of 365nm. Most of that light iε reflected by a chromatic beamεplitter 360 and transmitted through a piano convex lens 358 that focuses the light into the open end of the MEIA cartridge 68. The remainder of the excitation light iε transmitted through the chromatic beamsplitter 360 and illuminates an optical bandpasε filter 368 which transmits 365nm to a reference detector 366, a photodiode, which provides an output 367 to the optical control εyεtem 248. Aε a reεult of being exposed to excitation light energy, the contents of the MEIA cartridge 68 fluoresce at emisεion wavelengthε which include 450nm, repreεented by the S-εhaped arrowε. The emiεsion light is collected by a lens 358 and, because of the longer wavelength than the excitation, transmitε through the chromatic beamεplitter 360. The emiεsion proceeds through emission..■filters 370 and 372, which transmit light at 450nm, and finally illuminates a PMT 374. Power is supplied to the lamp 364 and the PMT 374 via inputs 365 and 374(a), respectively, and the PMT 374 correspondingly provides an output 374(b) to the optics control syεtem 248 which tranεmitε data from the PMT 374 to the central proceεεor 255. Another feature of the preεent invention iε the heater block 363 which maintainε the temperature of the lamp 364 at a minimum temperature of about 70 * C during periodε of nonuεe. This temperature must be high enough to ensure that the mercury in the lamp 364 remains in a vapor state to facilitate full brightness within about one εecond without adversely affecting the life of the lamp 364. The normal time period for changing from cold to full brightneεs is twenty (20) secondε. Thiε one-εecond cycle time for the lamp 364 is neceεεary for high-εpeed operation in a continuouε and random-acceεε analytical εystem, which will be deεcribed in more detail below. The FPIA and MEIA opticε εyεtem 284, 361 and the opticε control εyεtem 248 are shown in FIG. 64 separated by a dashed line. The output 308(b) from the PMT 308 and the output 313 from the reference τletector 312 are analog inputs to a digital signal processor A/D chip 250 ("DSP") which can be, for example, the type supplied by Crystal Semiconductor. The DSP 250 converts the analog signals to digital signals and sends them to the OSP 254 via an input bus 252. The OSP 254 is an- 8-bit microcontroller which can be, for example, an HC11 sold by Motorola. A digital output from the OSP 254 is provided to a digital to analog converter ("DAC") 269 via a serial output bus 268. Separate converter modules on the DAC 269 are connected to separate power supplieε 266 and 270 which drive the PMT 308 and the lamp 286, reεpectively, via outputε 267 and 271, respectively. The OSP 254 cycles the lamp 286 according to macro-commands received from the scheduler 256 and, when turning the lamp 286 on, increases its intensity to provide εufficient illumination for the contents of the cuvette 140 based on data stored in the εcheduler 256 and feedback from the reference detector 312. Typically, the illumination iε εet at about 200 microwattε at a frequency of 485 nm aε εhown in FIG. 20. The data in the scheduler 256 is part of a table which prescribes the required sample illumination based on the reagents known to be used in that particular FPIA reaction mixture. The OSP 254 simultaneouεly adjuεtε the output gain of the PMT 308 in response to commands from the scheduler 256 baεed on the assay being conducted. The OSP 284 also controls the liquid crystal 298 via the output 299 by creating and removing an E-field to switch between vertical and horizontal polarization based on commands from the scheduler 256. As indicated above and throughout this paragraph, all of the knowledge regarding the asεays and the reagents are resident in the scheduler 256 which relies on the OSP 254 for real-time execution in responεe to the macro-σommandε. The same is true when applied to the MEIA optics syεtem 361. The output 374(b) from the PMT 374 and output 367 from the reference detector 366 are analog inputε to another DSP 260 which convertε the analog signals to digital signalε for transmission to the OSP 254 via another input bus 262. The OSP 254 provides a digital output to separate converter modules on the DAC 269 via the serial output bus 268. These converter moduleε on the DAC 269 are connected to εeparate power εupplieε 276 and 280 * which drive the PMT 374 and the lamp 364, reεpectively, via outputε 374(a) and 365, reεpectively. The OSP 254 cycleε the lamp 364 according to micro-commandε received the εcheduler 256 and, when turning the lamp 364 on, increases its intensity to provide sufficient illumination for the contents for the MEIA cartridge 68 based on data stored in the scheduler 256 and feedback from the photo diode 366. Again, the data in the scheduler 256 is part of a table which prescribes the required sample illumination based on the reagents known to be used in that particular MEIA reaction mixture. The OSP 254 simultaneouεly adjuεtε the output gain of the PMT 374 in response to σommandε from the εcheduler 256 baεed on the aεsay being conducted. The operation of the optics control syεtem 248 in conjunction with the FPIA and MEIA opticε εyεtems 284, 361 can best be shown by the pictorial time graphs in FIGS. 65 and 66, respectively, which illustrate a simultaneous sequence of. events. Referring to FIG. 65, time iε divided into the following operational periods: the preread activity period 316, the read sequence period 314, and the normalization period 352. Each operational period is initiated by communications between the scheduler 256 and the OSP 254 as represented by communication signals 334, 336, 338 on the time line 332. During the period of each communication signal 334, 336, 338, the εcheduler 256 determines the amount of time necessary to simultaneouεly accompliεh all the eventε required for the correεponding operational period which iε initiated by the trailing edge of the communication εignal. More specifically, when the scheduler 256 determines the duration of the preread activity period 316, the trailing edge of the communication signal 334 initiates the preread activity period 316 during which the following events, occur: (1) the cuvette 140 is positioned by the carousel represented symbolically at 319 to be read by the PMT 308, (2) the polarization state of the liquid crystal 298 iε properly εet, (3) the gain of the PMT 308 iε set, and (4) the intensity of the lamp 286 iε increaεed to a level εufficient to illuminate the FPIA mixture in the cuvette 140. During the firεt event, the scheduler 256 allotε enough time 318 for the carouεel 319 to rotate the cuvette 140 to the proper position to be read. When the carouεel 319 εtopε, the εcheduler 256 then allotε a predetermined amount of time 320 for the carouεel 319 to stop moving or oscillating as indicated by the decaying εinuεoidal curve 321. During the second event, the scheduler 256 allots enough time 322 for the OSP 254 to transition the liquid crystal 298 from a vertical εtate of polarization represented by the vertically-lined icon to a horizontal polarization represented by the horizontally-lined icon, the εlanted-line icon therebetween repreεenting the tranεition period. During the third event, the scheduler 256 allots enough time 324 for the OSP 254 to adjust the gain of the PMT 308. And finally, during the fourth event, the scheduler 256 allots eno ' ugh time 326 for the OSP 254 to increase the intensity of the tungsten lamp 286 from a standby intensity 328, simmer state, to a higher full intensity 330, burn state, sufficient for illuminating the FPIA mixture in the cuvette 140. Cycling the lamp 286 from off to the full intensity 330 consumeε too much time for a rapid and continuously operating analytical system and shortens the life of the lamp 286. The standby intensity 328 is sufficiently low to extend the life of the lamp 286, but sufficiently close to its thermal operating point to facilitate a rapid increase to the full intensity 330 required for illuminating the FPIA mixture within the allotted period of time 326. Thiε feature iε critical in a continuouεly operating analytical εyεtem not only becauεe it extendε the life of the lamp 286, but alεo becauεe it εtabilizeε the full intenεity 330 by maintaining an elevated temperature. Although other eventε occur during the preread activity period 316, thoεe juεt deεcribed are moεt relevant to the inεtant invention. The εcheduler 256 alεo determineε the proper duration of the read εequence period 314 during the communication period 336, the trailing edge of which initiateε the read εequence period 314 while holding the gain of the PMT 308 and the illumination of the tungsten lamp 286 constant after the preread-activity period 316. During the read sequence period 314, the scheduler 256 allots enough time 342 for the PMT 308 to sense the energy .level of the light emitted from the fluoresσing mixture in the cuvette 140 during horizontal polarization as represented by the two horizontally-lined icons and send the corresponding analog signals to the DSP 250. The scheduler 256 then allows enough time 346 for the OSP 254 to transition the liquid crystal 298 from horizontal to vertical polarization as represented by the slanted-line icon. At the end of the read sequence period 314, the εcheduler 256 allotε enough time 348 for the PMT 308 to εenεe the energy level of the light emitted from the fluoreεσing mixture in the cuvette 140 during vertical polarization aε εhown by the vertically-lined icons and send the correεponding analog εignalε to the DPS 250. * After the read εequence period 314 and during the normalization period 352, the OSP 254 automatically returns the liquid crystal 298 back to its normal state as indicated by the icons, reduces the gain of the PMT 308, and reduces the intensity of the tungsten lamp 286 back to the standby intensity 328. The scheduler 256 iε free to initiate another period εequence at any time during the period of unspecified length 354. The OSP 254 transmits all the data collected during the read sequence period 314 to the CPU 255 during the scheduler communication period 338. The operation of the optics control syεtem 248 in conjunction with the MEIA optic εystem 361 is shown in FIG. 66 wherein time is divided into the following similar operational periods: the preread activity period 378, the read εequence period 376, and the normalization period 417. Each operational period is initiated by communication between the εcheduler 256 and the OSP 254 aε represented by communication signals 394, 396, 398 on the time line 392. During the period of each communication εignal 394, 396, 398, the scheduler 256 determines the amount of time necesεary to simultaneously accomplish all the events required for the corresponding operational period which is initiated by the trailing edge of the communication signal. More εpecifically, when the scheduler 256 determineε the duration of the preread activity period 378, the trailing edge of the communication signal 394 initiateε the preread activity period 378 during which the following eventε occur: (1) the MEIA cartridge 68 iε poεitioned by the carouεel repreεented εymbolically at 381 to be read by the PMT 374, (2) the gain of the PMT 374 iε εet, and (3) the intenεity of the mercury vapor lamp 364 iε increased to a level sufficient to illuminate the MEIA mixture in the MEIA cartridge 68. During the first event, the scheduler 256 allots enough time 380 for the carousel 381 to rotate the cartridge 68 to the proper position to be read. When the carousel 381 stops, the scheduler 256 then allots a predetermined time 382 for the carousel 381 to stop moving or oscillating as indicated by the decaying εinuεoidal curve 383. During the εecond event, the εcheduler 256 allotε enough time 384 for the OSP 254 to adjuεt the gain of the PMT 374. During the third event, the εcheduler 256 allots enough time 386 for the OSP 254 to increase the intensity of the mercury lamp 364 from a standby intensity 388, simmer εtate, to a full intenεity 390, burn εtate, εufficient for illuminating the MEIA mixture in the cartridge 68. Cycling the lamp 364 from off to the full intenεity 390 consumes too much time for a rapid and continuously operating analytical syεtem and shortens the life of the lamp 364. In order to extend the life of the lamp 364, a means for maintaining the thermal operating point of the lamp 364 must be employed for periods of time when the lamp 364 is not needed for illumination. Either of two methods are used. One method iε to operate the lamp 364 at a current which iε sufficiently low to extend the life of the lamp 364, but sufficiently close to its thermal operating point to facilitate a rapid increase to the full intensity 390 required for illuminating the MEIA mixture within the allotted period of time 386. The other method of maintaining the lamp 364 close to its thermal operating point is to encase the lamp 364 in a heater housing 363, which is controlled so aε to maintain the lamp 364 at an elevated temperature of approximately 70 degrees C at all times. This feature is critical to a continuously operating analytical syεtem not only becauεe it extends the life of the lamp 364, but also becauεe itε εtabilizeε the full intenεity 390 by maintaining an elevating temperature. Although other eventε occur during the preread activity period .378, thoεe juεt deεcribed are moεt relevant to the inεtant invention.* The εcheduler 256 alεo determineε the proper direction of the read εequence period 376 during the communication period 396, the trailing edge of which initiateε the read εequence period 376 while holding the gain of the PMT 364 and the illumination of the mercury vapor lamp 364 conεtant after the preread activity period 378. During the read εequence period 376, the εcheduler 256 allocates enough time 400 for the PMT 374 to εenεe the energy level of light emitted from the fluoreεcing mixture in the cartridge 68 during a εub-read period 402 and εend the correεponding analog εignalε to the DSP 260 during a dwell period 404. The read εequence period 376 continueε with εimilar cycleε like cycle 406, including sub-read period 408 and dwell period 410, as represented by the broken time line 412. After about eight. (8) of such sub-readings depending upon the asεay being performed, the read εequence period 376 concludes with a final sub-reading 416. After the read sequence period 376 and during the normalization period 417, the OSP 254 automatically reduces the gain of the PMT 374 and the intensity of the mercury vapor lamp 364 back to the standby intensity 388. The scheduler 256 iε free to initiate another preread sequence at any time during the period of unspecified length 418. The OSP 254 alεo transmitε all of the data collected during the read εequence period 376 to the CPU 255 during the έcheduler communication period 398. KITTING AND PROCESS ACTIVITIES It iε to be appreciated that the following deεcription compriεeε an outline of the variouε functionε and εtepε involved in preferred methodε of the automated analytical εystem of the invention, in exemplary kitting and process activities, which functions and methods as will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, are conducted under computer control uεing variouε types of mathematical algorithms and asεociated computer εoftware, depending on the particular menu of aεsays being performed on the instrument. DESCRIPTION OF ACTIVITIES FOR FPIA ASSA Y KITTING AREA A. ASSUMPTIONS 1. Analyzer is in Standby/Ready mode when εample iε loaded. Syεtem haε been previouεly initialized (All motorε are homed, εyringe and pumpε are purged, all electronics and sensors are checked. ) 2. Waste has been emptied, Diluent, MEIA buffer, MUP, and Quat bulk liquid conεumableε have been checked for sufficient volume. 3. All conεumable inventory fileε have been updated. B. PREPARATION STEPS 1. User loads empty Reaction Vessel (RV) into RV carousel. 2. To load a reagent pack(s), the user must first pause the front end carouεelε. The εystem will complete kitting of the current teεt and tranεfer the teεt to the proceεs area. 3. User opens the reagent carousel cover, loads reagent pack(s) into reagent carouεel, cloεes the reagent carousel cover, then resumes the front-end. 4. Instrument automatically scans all reagent packs onboard to verify reagent status. (a) Each reagent pack is positioned in front of the reagent pack barcode reader by rotation of the reagent carousel. (b) Reagent pack barcode reader reads barcode to identify asεay type and carouεel location. (c) If the barcode iε unreadable, the system will request a barcode override. (d) If the barcode is good or override complete, the syεtem will check the εyεtem inventory. The user will be notified if the pack iε found to be empty, invalid or outdated. Once the reagent pack iε found to be good, it iε ready to uεe. C. REQUESTING A TEST 1. Uεer haε two optionε for requeεting a teεt or group of teεtε on one or more patient εampleε. (a) Uεer may download the teεt request loadlist from a host computer to create an order liεt. (b) Uεer enterε teεt requeεt or createε an order list on the System directly. 2. If sample cups (no barcode) are used, the following scenario occurs: (a) User refers to order list for εegment ID and poεition number to place εample. (b) Uεer loads a sample cup into referenced poεition in εegment. (c) Uεer transfers patient sample from blood collection tube into εample cup. (d) Segment is placed into sample carousel. (e) Indication is made to instrument that sampleε have been loaded. (f) Inεtrument checks conεumable inventorieε, waste εtatuε, cal εtatuε, etc. (g) Sample carousel rotates εegment to εegment identification reader. (h) Inεtrument readε segment identification. 3. If primary tubes (with barcode) are used, the following scenario occurs (two types of carriers are used for primary tubeε: one for tubeε with heightε of 75 mm and a εecond for tubeε with heights of 100 mm. ): (a) User loadε primary tube into next available segment location on sample carousel. (b) Indication is made to instrument that samples are available to be run. (c) Instrument checks conεumable inventorieε, waεte status, cal status, etc. D. SCHEDULING A TEST 1. When the sample iε presented to the pipettor, the System attemptε to schedule the teεtε ordered on that εample for proceεεing. Each teεt ordered for the sample will be scheduled separately. (b) The System checks for adequate inventory (reagent packs, cartridges, buffer, MUP), syεtem resources, sample time to complete the test. (c) The System checks for valid calibration or orders for them on the order list. (d) If all test requirements are met, the test is scheduled for proσesεing. (e) If all teεt requirementε are not met, the teεt requeεt iε moved to the exception liεt. Once the teεt requirementε have been met, the teεt requeεt iε moved back to the order liεt by the uεer. 2. When a test has been scheduled, the System moves it to the proceεεing liεt and attempts to schedule other tests ordered for that sample. 3. When all testε for the current εample have been kitted, the Syεtem advanceε to the next εample on the εample carouεel. E. KITTING A TEST 1. Once a teεt iε εσheduled, it iε immediately kitted. (No teεtε are kitted until the scheduler ensures that the test can be transferred onto the process carousel immediately and processed within the timing requirements of the aεεay. ) 2. RV carouεel is rotated clockwise until an RV is detected in pipette axis position. 3. Reagent pack carousel is rotated until reagent pack for test ordered iε at the actuator poεition. The actuator openε the reagent cartridge capε and the reagent pack carouεel iε then rotated until a reagent pack for teεt ordered iε in the pipette axiε poεition. After all pipetting εtepε have been completed, the reagent pack carouεel is rotated back to the actuator poεition where the reagent cartridge capε are cloεed. 4. Sample carousel is rotated until sample cup (or primary tube) iε in pipette axiε poεition. 5. Pipette iε alwayε at "HOME" poεition (Pipette R-axiε is parked over waεh εtation and Pipette Z-axiε iε at the Z-clear poεition) when not in uεe. 6. Sample kitting. (a) Sample aspirate. (i) Syringe aspirateε "X" μl of air at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (ii) Pipette R-axiε is moved over sample cup. (iii) Pipette Z-axis iε moved down to the Z-above poεition. (iv) ...LLS iε enabled to ensure that no liquid is currently detected. (v) Pipette Z-axis iε moved down at constant speed until fluid is detected or until Z-Asp limit has been reached (It will be asεumed that fluid iε detected) (vi) Baεed on the Z-height poεition at which fluid is detected and the Z-height/volume table, the System calculates the volume of fluid in the well and compares it to the volume specified in the pipetting description. If sufficient volume is present in the well, the aspiration sequence is initiated (If insufficient volume is present, the test iε aborted and the test request moved to the exception list. The exception list provides notice to an operator of testε which cannot be completed). (vii) The following occur εimultaneously until the total volume of sample required is aspirated: (1) Pipette Z-axis motor is moved down at a rate of "X" steps/sec. (2) Syringe motor aspirates "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (3) Liquid Level Sense -(LLS) is checked to ensure probe still in liquid. LLS is disabled. Pipette Z-axiε is moved up to Z-clear position. (4) Pipette R-axis is moved over the RV sample well. (5) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the dispenεe -position within the RV sample well. (6) Syringe dispenses "X" μl of sample at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (7) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved up to Z-clear poεition. (b) Probe Poεt-Wash The probe is washed to ensure that it is free from contamination. It is to be underεtood that all pipette activities (in both kitting and procesε areaε) are followed with a probe post-wash to minimize carryover from one fluid aspirate to another. In some cases, pipette activities may be preceded with a probe prewash if neceεεary to guarantee the validity of the next fluid aεpirate. For thiε aεεay deεcription, it will be aεεumed that only a poεt-waεh iε uεed. (i) The inside of the probe is cleaned firεt. (1) Pipette R-axiε iε moved over waεte area. (2) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to appropriate position within the waste area. (3) The wash valve is opened for the amount of time specified in the assay protocol. (4) Wash valve is cloεed. (5) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved up to the Z-clear poεition. (ii) The outεide of the probe iε cleaned next. (1) Pipette R-axiε iε moved over wash cup. (2) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to waεh poεition within the waεh cup. (3) The waεh valve is opened for the amount of time specified in the asεay protocol. (4) Waεh valve iε cloεed. (iii) Pipette iε returned to "HOME" position. 7. Popper kitting ("Popper" iε defined as a subεtanσe which eliminateε interfering εubstances in assays such aε, for example, thoεe diεcuεεed and claimed in U. S. Patent 4, 492, 762 iεεued January 8, 1985 and hereby incorporated herein by reference. ) (a) Popper aεpirate. (i) Syringe aspirates "X" μl of air at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (ii) Pipette R-Axis is moved over the popper reagent bottle in the Reagent Pack. (iii) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the Z-above position. " ' (iv) LLS is enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (v) Pipette Z-axis is moved down at constant speed until fluid is detected or until the Z- aspiration-lower (Z-Asp) limit is reached (it will be assumed that fluid iε detected). (vi) Baεed on the Z-height poεition at which fluid iε detected and the Z-height/volume table, the Syεtem calculateε the volume of fluid in the well and compareε it to the volume εpecified in the pipetting deεcription. If εufficient volume iε present in the well, the aspiration sequence iε initiated (if εufficient volume iε not preεent, the teεt iε aborted and the teεt requeεt moved to the exception liεt). (vii) The following occur εimultaneouεly until the total volume of popper required iε aεpirated: (1) Pipette Z-axiε motor iε moved down at a rate of "X" εtepε/sec. (2) Syringe aεpirateε "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (3) LLS iε checked to ensure probe still in liquid. (4) LLS is disabled. (5) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to Z-clear position. - • (6) Pipette R-axis is moved over the RV reagent 1 well. (7) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the dispenεe poεition within the RV reagent 1 well. (8) Syringe diεpenεeε "X" μl of popper at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (9) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved up to Z-clear poεition. (b) Probe poεt-waεh. The probe is again washed to ensure that it is free from contamination as described in section 6 (Sample Kitting). 8. Antiserum kitting (a) Antiserum aspir-ate (i) Syringe aεpirates "X" μl of air at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (ii) Pipette R-Axiε iε moved over the antiεerum reagent bottle in the Reagent Pack. (iii) Pipette Z-axiε is moved down to the Z-above position. (iv) LLS is enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (v) Pipette Z-axis is moved down at constant speed until fluid is detected or until the Z- Aεp limit iε reached (it will be aεεumed that fluid is detected). (vi) Based on the Z-height position at which fluid is detected and the Z-height/volume table, the System calculates the volume of fluid in the well and compares it to the volume εpecified in the pipetting deεcription. If εufficient volume iε preεent in the well, the aspiration sequence is initiated (if sufficient volume is not present, the test is aborted and the test request moved to the exception liεt). (vii) The following occur εimultaneously until the total volume .of antiserum required iε aεpirated: (1) Pipette Z-axiε motor iε moved down at a rate of "X" εtepε/sec. (2) Syringe aspirateε "X" micro liter (μl) at a rate of "X" μl/εec. LLS iε checked to ensure probe still in liquid. (3) LLS is disabled. (4) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to Z-clear position. (5) Pipette R-axis iε moved over the RV reagent 2 well. (6) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved down to the diεpense position within the RV reagent 2 well. (7) Syringe dispenεeε "X" μl of antiεerum at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (8) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved up to Z-clear position. (b) Probe post-waεh. The probe iε again waεhed to enεure that it iε free from contamination as described in section 6 (Sample Kitting). 9. Tracer kitting. (a) Tracer aεpirate. (i) Syringe aεpirateε "X" μl of air at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (ii) Pipette R-Axis is moved over the tracer reagent bottle in the Reagent Pack. (iii) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the Z-above position. (iv) LLS iε enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (v) Pipette Z-axis is moved down at constant speed until fluid is detected or until the Z- Asp limit is reached (it will be assumed that fluid is detected). (vi) Based on the Z-height position at which fluid is detected and the Z-height/volume table, the System calculates the volume of fluid in " the well and compares it to the volume specified in the pipetting description. If sufficient volume is present in the well, the-'aspiration εequenσe is initiated, (if sufficient volume is not present, the test is aborted and the test request moved to the exception list). (vii) The following occur simultaneouεly until the total volume of tracer required is aspirated: (1) Pipette Z-axis motor is moved down at a rate of "X" steps/sec. (2) Syringe aspirateε "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (3) LLS iε checked to ensure probe still in liquid. (4) LLS iε diεabled. (5) Pipette Z-axiε is moved up to Z-clear position. (6) Pipette R-axiε iε moved over the RV reagent 3 well. (7) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved down to the diεpenεe poεition within the RV reagent 3 well. (8) Syringe diεpenεeε "X" μl of tracer at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (9) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to Z-clear position. (b) Probe post-waεh. The probe iε again waεhed to ensure that it is free from contamination as described in εection 6 (Sample Kitting). F. TRANSFER OF REACTION VESSEL (RV) INTO PROCESS AREA 1. RV carouεel iε rotated to transfer station. 2. Procesε carouεel is rotated so that the empty poεition is' aligned with the transfer station. 3. Transfer mechanism 0-axis iε rotated to εample entry area. 4. Tranεfer echaniεm R-axiε grabs the RV and pulls it into the transfer mechaniεm. 5. Tranεfer mechaniεm 0-axiε iε rotated so that RV is aligned with the empty position on the process carousel. 6. RV is loaded onto proceεε carouεel. PROCESS AREA A. Wait for temperature equilibration time and evaporation window to expire. B. FIRST PIPETTE ACTIVITY (preparation of sample blank comprising diluted sample and popper). 1. Incubation timer is set according to assay file specifications. 2. Precision diluent aspirate. The following activities are performed simultaneouεly: (a) Syringe aεpirateε "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (b) Waεh valve iε opened. (c) Wait "n" εecondε. (d) Waεh valve iε ' cloεed. 3. Sample aεpirate. " (a) Pipette R-axiε is moved over the RV εample well. (b) LLS is enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (c) Pipette Z-axiε is moved down at constant speed until fluid iε detected OR until the Z-Aεp limit iε reached (it will be aεεumed that fluid iε detected). (d) Baεed on the Z-height poεition at which fluid iε detected and the Z-height/volume table, the Syεtem calculates the volume of fluid in the well and compares it to the volume specified in the pipetting deεcription. If εufficient volume iε preεent, the aεpiration sequence iε initiated (if εufficient volume iε not present, the test is aborted ' and the test request moved to the exception liεt). (e) The following occur εimultaneouεly until the total volume of εample required iε aεpirated: (i) Pipettor Z-axiε motor iε moved down at a rate of "X" εtepε/εec. (ii) Syringe aεpirateε "x" μl of εample at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (iii) LLS iε checked to enεure probe εtill in liquid. (iv) LLS is disabled. (v) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to Z-above position. 4. Diluent/sample dispensed to the RV predilute well. (a) Pipette R-axiε iε moved over the RV predilute well. (b) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved down to the diεpense position within the RV predilute well. (c) Syringe diεpenεes "X" μl of diluent/sample at" a rate of "X" μl/sec. (d) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved up to Z-clear poεition. 5. Probe poεt-waεh. The probe iε again waεhed to ensure that it iε free from contamination as described in section 6 (Sample kitting). 6. Precision diluent aspirate. The following activities are performed simultaneouεly: (a) Syringe aεpirateε "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (b) Wash valve is opened. (c) Wait "n" seconds. (d) Wash valve is closed. 7. Popper aspirate. (a) Pipette R-axis is moved over the RV Reagent (popper) well. (b) LLS is enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (c) Pipette Z-axis is moved down at constant speed until fluid is detected or until the Z-Asp limit iε reached (it will be assumed that fluid is detected). (d) Based on the Z-height position at which fluid is detected and the Z-height/volume table, the System calculates the volume of fluid in the well and compares it to the volume specified in the pipetting deεcription. If εufficient volume iε preεent, the aεpiration εequence iε initiated (if εufficient volume is not preεent, the teεt iε aborted and the teεt requeεt moved to the exception liεt). (e) The following occur simultaneously until the total volume of popper required is aεpirated: (i) Pipette Z-axiε motor iε moved down at a rate of "X" steps /sec. (ii) Syringe aspirates "X" μl at a rate of "x" μl/sec. (iii) LLS iε checked to ensure probe still in liquid. (iv) LLS is disabled, (v) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to the Z- above position. 8. Diluted sample aspirate. (a) - Pipette R-axis is moved over the RV predilute well. (b) LLS iε enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (c) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved down at conεtant εpeed until fluid iε detected or until the Z-Aεp limit iε reached (it will be aεεumed that fluid iε detected). (d) Based oh the Z-height position at which fluid iε detected and the Z-height/volume table, the Syεtem calσulateε the volume of fluid in the well and compareε it to the volume εpecified in the pipetting deεcription. If εufficient volume iε preεent, the aεpiration εequence iε initiated (if εufficient volume iε not present, the test is aborted and the test request moved to the exception liεt). (e) The following occur εimultaneously until the total volume of diluted sample required is aspirated: (i) Pipette Z-axis motor is moved down at a rate of "X" steps/sec. (ii) Syringe aspirates "X" μl at a rate of "x" μl/sec. (iii) LLS is checked to ensure probe still in liquid. (iv) LLS is disabled. (v) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to the Z- above poεition. 11. Diluted εample/popper diluent diεpensed to RV cuvette. (a) Pipette R-axis is moved over to the RV cuvette position. (b) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the diεpenεe poεition in the RV cuvette. (c) Syringe dispenseε "X" μl of diluted εample/popper/diluent at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (d) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to the Z- above position. 12. Probe post-wash. The probe is again washed to ensure that it is free from contamination as described in section 6 (εample kitting) to complete firεt pipette activity. C. BLANK PREREAD ACTIVITY PERIOD (allotted time 378). When the incubation timer expires, the FPIA optics syεtem 284 simultaneously performs the following activities in responεe to the εcheduler 256 and the opticε control system 248 as described above, in more detail: 1. The carousel 46 positions the cuvette 140 for a reading. 2. The polarization state of the liquid crystal 298 is set. 3. The gain of the PMT 308 is set. 4. The intenεity of the lamp 286 iε increaεed from the simmer state to the burn state. D. BLANK READ SEQUENCE PERIOD (allotted time 314). ' The FPIA optics εystem 284 then performs the following in reεponεe to the scheduler 256 and the optics control syεtem 248 aε deεcribed above: 1. The intensity with horizontal polarization is read during the allotted time period 342. 2. The εtate of the liquid crystal 298 is transitioned to vertical polarization, allowing enough time for εettling, during the allotted time 246. 3. The intenεity with vertical polarization is read during the allotted time period 348. 4. The OSP 254 converts the digitized analog signals from the PMT 308 to normalized readings by comparing the intensity at the detector 312 to the intensity of the lamp 286 ("background readings"). E. BLANK NORMALIZATION PERIOD. 1. The OSP 254 transmits the background readings to the CPU 255 to be stored. 2. The intensity of the lamp 286 is decreased back to the simmer εtate. F. SECOND PIPETTE ACTIVITY (for reaction between diluted εample, popper, tracer and antiεerum). 1. Incubation timer iε εet according to aεεay file εpecificationε. 2. Preciεion diluent aεpirate. (a) The following activitieε are performed εimultaneously: (i) Syringe aspirateε "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (ii) Waεh valve is opened. (iii) Wait "n" secondε. (iv) Waεh valve iε closed. 3. Antiεerum aεpirate. (i) Pipette R-axis is moved over the RV Reagent 2 (antiserum) well. (ii) LLS is enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (iii) Pipette Z-axis is moved down at constant speed until fluid is detected OR until the Z- Aεp limit iε reached (it will be aεsumed that fluid is detected). (iv) Based on the Z-height position at which fluid is detected and the Z-height/volume table, the System calculates the volume of fluid in the well and compares it to the volume specified in the pipetting description. If sufficient volume is present, the aεpiration εequence iε initiated. (If sufficient volume iε not preεent, the teεt iε aborted and the teεt request moved to the exception list. ) (v) The following occur εimultaneouεly until the total volume of antiεerum required iε aεpirated: (1) Pipette Z-axiε motor iε moved down at a rate of "X" εtepε/sec. (2) Syringe aspirates "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (3) LLS iε checked to enεure probe εtill in liquid. (4) LLS iε diεabled. (5) Pipette Z-axiε is moved up to the Z-above position. 4. Tracer aspirate. (a) Syringe aspirates "X" μl of air at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (b) Pipette R-axis is moved over the RV Reagent 3 (tracer) well. (c) LLS is enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (d) Pipette Z-axis is moved down at constant speed until fluid...is detected OR until the Z-Asp limit is reached (it will be assumed that fluid is detected). (e) Based on the Z-height position at which fluid is detected and the Z-height/volume table, the Syεtem calculateε the volume of fluid in the well and σompareε it to the volume εpecified in the pipetting deεcription. If εufficient volume is present, the aspiration sequence is initiated (if sufficient volume iε not preεent, the teεt iε aborted and the teεt requeεt moved to the exception liεt). (f) The following occur εimultaneouεly until the total volume of tracer required iε aεpirated: (i) Pipette Z-axiε motor is moved down at a rate of "X" stepε/εec. (ii) Syringe aspirateε "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (iii) LLS iε checked to ensure probe still' in liquid. (v) LLS iε diεabled. (vi) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to the Z- above poεition. 5. Diluted sample aspirate. (a) Pipette R-axis is moved over the RV predilute well. (b) LLS iε enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (c) Pipette Z-axis is moved down at constant speed until fluid is detected OR until the Z-Asp limit is reached (it will be assumed that fluid is detected). . -(d) Based on the Z-height position at which fluid is detected and the Z-height/volume table, the System calculates the volume of fluid in the well and compareε it to the volume εpecified in the pipetting description. If sufficient volume is present, the aspiration sequence iε initiated (if sufficient volume is not present, the test is aborted and the test request moved to the exception list. ) (e) The following occur simultaneouεly until the total volume of diluted εample required iε aεpirated: (1) Pipette Z-axis motor is moved down at a rate of "X" steps/sec. (2) Syringe aεpirateε "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (3) LLS iε checked to ensure probe still in liquid. (4) LLS is disabled. (5) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to the Z-above position. 6. Diluted sample/tracer/aspirate/antiserum/ diluent dispenεed to RV cuvette. (a) Pipette R-axiε iε moved over to the RV cuvette position. (b) Pipette Z-axis iε moved down to the diεpense position in the RV cuvette. (c) Syringe dispenεes "X" μl of diluted sa ple/tracer/air/antiεerum/diluent at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (d) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved up to the Z- above poεition. 7. Probe poεt-waεh. The probe iε again waεhed to ensure that it iε free from contamination aε deεcribed in εection 6 (Sample kitting) to complete the εecond pipette activity. 8. Next activity εtarted when incubation timer expireε. G. FINAL PREREAD ACTIVITY PERIOD (allotted time 378). When the incubation timer expireε, the FPIA opticε εyεtem 284 simultaneously performs the following activities in responεe to the εcheduler 256 and the opticε control εystem 248 as described above in more detail: 1. The carousel 46 positions the cuvette 140 for a reading. 2. The polarization state of the liquid crystal 298 is set. 3. The gain of the PMT 308 is set. 4. The intenεity of the lamp 286 iε increaεed from the simmer state to the burn state. H. FINAL READ SEQUENCE PERIOD (allotted time 314). The FPIA optics εyεtem 284 then performε the following in reεponεe to the εcheduler 256 and the optics control syεtem 248 aε deεcribed above: 1. The intenεity with horizontal polarization iε read during the allotted time period 342. 2. The εtate of the liquid cryεtal 298 iε tranεitioned to vertical polarization, allowing enough time for settling, during the allotted time 246. 3. The intensity with vertical polarization is read during the allotted time period 348. 4. The OSP 254 converts the digitized analog signalε from the PMT 308 to normalized readings by comparing the intensity at the detector 312 to the intensity of the lamp 286 ("final readings"). I. FINAL NORMALIZATION PERIOD: 1. The OSP 254 transmitε the final readings to the CPU 255 to be εtored. 2. The CPU 255 is. used to calculate the NET intensify (I) and the millipolarization (mP) which iε calibrated againεt a εtandard curve to determine a concentration reεult. 3. The intenεity of the lamp 286 is decreased back to the simmer state. J. RV UNLOAD (this activity occurs when resources are not in use). The following are performed simultaneouεly: 1. Proceεε carouεel is rotated so that the empty position is at the transfer station. Transfer mechanism 0-axis iε moved to prόceεε carouεel. 2. RV iε grabbed with the tranεfer mechaniεm R- axis and pulled into the transfer mechanism. 3. Transfer mechanism 0--axis iε rotated so that RV is aligned with the waste container. 4. RV is pushed into the waste container. DESCRIPTION OF ACTIVITIES FOR MEIA ASSAY KITTING AREA A. ASSUMPTIONS 1. Analyzer is in Standby/Ready mode when sample is loaded. System has been previously initialized (All motors are homed, syringe and pumps are purged, all electronics and senεors are checked). 2. Waste has been emptied, dilution, MEIA buffer, MUP, and Quat bulk liquid consumableε have been checked for εuffiσient volume. 3. Cartridges have been placed into hopper and are available for loading onto auxiliary carousel when needed (for MEIA asεays only). 4. All- .consumable inventory files have been updated. B. PREPARATION STEPS 1. User loads empty RVs into RV carouεel. 2. To load a reagent pack(ε), the user must first pause the front end carouselε. The system will complete kitting of the current test and transfer the test to the procesε area. 3. Uεer openε the reagent carouεel, loadε reagent pack(s) into reagent carousel, closeε the reagent carouεel cover, then resumes the front-end. 4. Instrument automatically scans all reagent packs onboard to verify reagent status. 5. Each reagent pack is positioned in front of the reagent pack barcode reader by rotation of the reagent carousel. 6. Reagent pack barcode reader readε barcode to identify aεsay type and carousel location. If the barcode is unreadable, the system will request a barcode override. 7. If the barcode is good or override complete, the system will check the syεtem inventory. The uεer will be notified if the pack is found to be empty, invalid or outdated. Once the reagent pack is found to be good, it is ready to use. C. REQUESTING A TEST 1. User has two options for requesting a test or group of testε on one or more patient εampleε. (a) Uεer may download the teεt requeεt loadliεt from a hoεt computer to create an order liεt. (b) Uεer enterε teεt requeεt or createε an order liεt on the System directly. 2. If εample cupε (no barcode) are uεed, the following scenario occurs: (a) User refers to order list for εegment ID and position number to place sample. (b) User loads a sample cup into referenced poεition in εegment. (c) Uεer tranεfers patient sample from blood collection tube into εample cup. (d) Segment iε placed into εample carouεel. (e) Indication is made to instrument that sampleε have been loaded. (f) Instrument checks consumable inventories, waste εtatuε, assay calibration, etc. (g) Sample carouεel rotateε εegment to εegment identification reader. (h) Inεtrument reads εegment identification. 3. If primary tubes (with barcode) are used, the following scenario occurs: (a) User loads primary tube into next available " segment location on sample carousel (two types of carriers are used for primary tubes: one for tubes with heightε of 75 mm and a εecond for tubeε with heightε of 100 mm. ). (b) Indication iε made to inεtrument that εampleε are available to be run. (c) Sample carousel rotateε εegment to εegment identification reader. D. SCHEDULING A TEST l. When the εample iε presented to the pipettor, the System attempts to schedule the testε ordered on •2 13 - that sample for processing. Each test ordered for the sample will be εcheduled separately. (a) The System checks for adequate inventory (reagent packs, cartridgeε, buffer, MUP), εyεtem resources, sample time to complete the test. (b) The System checks for valid calibration or orders for them on the order list. (c) If all test requirements are met, the test is scheduled for proceεεing. (d) If all teεt requirements are not met, the test request is moved to the exception list. Once the test requirements have been met, the test request is moved back to the order list by the user. 2. When a teεt haε been εcheduled, the εyεtem moves it to the procesεing liεt and attempts to schedule other testε ordered for that εample. 3. When all teεts for the current sample, have been kitted, the System advances to the next sample on the εample carouεel. E. KITTING A TEST 1. Once a teεt iε εcheduled, it iε immediately kitted. (no teεtε are kitted until the scheduler enεureε that the teεt can be transferred onto the procesε carousel immediately and processed within the timing requirements of the asεay). 2. RV carouεel is rotated clockwise until an RV is detected in pipette axis position. 3. Reagent pack carousel is rotated until reagent pack for test ordered is at the actuator position. The actuator opens the reagent cartridge caps and the reagent pack carousel is then rotated until reagent pack for test ordered is in the pipette axis position. After all pipetting steps have been completed, the reagent pack carousel is rotated back to the actuator position where the reagent cartridge capε are closed. 4. Sample .carousel is rotated until sample cup (or primary tube) is in pipette axis position. 5. Pipette is always at HOME position (Pipette R-axis is parked over wash εtation and Pipette Z-axiε iε at the Z-clear position) when not in use. 6. Sample kitting. (a) Sample aspirate. (i) Syringe aspirateε "X" μl of air at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (ii) Pipette R-axiε iε moved over εample cup. (iii) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the Z-above position. (iv) Pipette Z-axis iε moved down to the Z-LLS poεition. (v) LLS iε enabled to ensure that no liquid iε currently detected. (vi) Pipette Z-axis is moved down at constant εpeed until fluid iε detected or until Z-Aεp limit has been reached (it will be asεumed that fluid iε detected). (vii) Baεed on the Z-height position at which fluid is detected and the Z-height/volume table, the System calculates the volume of fluid in the well and compareε it to the volume εpeci.fied in the pipetting deεcription. If sufficient volume is present in the well, the aspiration εequence is initiated (if sufficient volume is not present, the test is aborted and the test request moved to the exception list). • (viii) The following occur simultaneouεly until the total volume of sample required is aspirated: (1) Pipette Z-axis motor is moved down at a rate of "X" εtepε/sec. (2) Syringe aεpirateε "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (3) LLS iε checked*to ensure probe still in liquid. (4) LLS is disabled. (5) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to Z-clear position. (6) Pipette R-axis is moved over the RV sample well. (7) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the dispense position within the RV sample well. (8) Syringe diεpenses "X" μl of sample at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (9) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved up to Z-clear poεition. (b) Probe post-wash. The probe is washed to ensure that it is free from contamination. It is to be underεtood that pipette activitieε in both kitting and proσeεε areas are generally followed with a probe post-waεh to minimize carryover from one fluid aεpirate to another. In some cases, pipette activities may be preceded with a probe prewash if necessary to guarantee the validity of the next fluid aspirate. For this asεay deεcription, it will be aεεumed that only a poεt-waεh iε uεed . (i) The inεide of the probe is cleaned firεt. (1) Pipette R-axiε iε moved over waste area. (2) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved down to appropriate poεition within the waεte area. (3) The wash valve is opened for the amount of time specified in the asεay protocol. (4) Waεh valve iε cloεed. (ii) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved up to the Z- clear poεition. (iii) The outεide of the probe is cleaned next. (1) Pipette R-axis is moved over wash cup. (2) Pipette Z-axis iε moved down to wash position within the wash cup. (3) The wash valve is opened for the amount of time specified in the asεay protocol. (4) Waεh valve iε cloεed. (5) Pipette iε returned to "HOME" position. 7. Microparticle kitting. (a) Microparticle aspirate (microparticles are pipetted directly into the RV incubation well to save on volume, aε thiε iε the moεt coεtly MEIA reagent). (i) Syringe aεpirateε "X" μl of air at a rate of "X" μl/εec. ' (ii) Pipette R-Axiε iε moved over the microparticle reagent bottle in the Reagent Pack. (iii) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved down to the Z-above poεition. (iv) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved down to the Z-LLS position. (v) LLS is enabled to ensure no-liquid currently detected. (vi) Pipette Z-axis is moved down at constant speed until fluid is detected or until the Z- Aεp limit iε reached (it will be aεεumed that fluid is detected) (vii) Baεed on the Z-height poεition at which fluid iε detected and the Z-height/volume table, the Syεtem calculateε the volume of fluid in the well and compareε it to the volume εpecified in the pipetting description. If sufficient volume is present in the well, the aspiration sequence is initiated (if sufficient volume is not preεent, the teεt iε aborted and the teεt requeεt moved to the exception liεt). (viii) The following occur εimultaneouεly until the total volume of microparticleε required is aεpirated: (1) Pipette Z-axis motor is moved down at a rate of "X" stepε/sec. (2) Syringe aspi.rateε "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (3) LLS is checked to ensure probe still in liquid. (ix) LLS is disabled. (x) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved up to Z-clear poεition. (xi) Pipette R-axis is moved over the RV incubation well. (xii) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the dispenεe poεition within the RV incubation well. (xiii) Syringe diεpenεeε "X" μl of microparticleε at a rate of "X" μl/εec. Pipette Z-axiε iε moved up to Z-clear poεition. (b) Probe post-waεh. The probe iε again waεhed to ensure that it is free from contamination as described in section 6 (Sample kitting). 8. Conjugate kitting. (a) Conjugate aspirate (conjugate, special waεh fluid, and/or εpecimen diluent are pipetted into either RV reagent wells or RV predilution well, depending on volume requirements). (i) Syringe aspirateε "X" μl of air at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (ii) Pipette R-Axiε iε moved over the conjugate reagent bottle in the Reagent Pack. (iii) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the Z-above position. (iv) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the Z-LLS position. (v) LLS is enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (vi) Pipette Z-axis is moved down at constant speed until fluid is detected or until the Z- Asp limit is reached (it will be asεumed that fluid is detected). (vii) Baεed on the Z-height position at which fluid is detected and the Z-height/volume table, the System calculates the volume of fluid in the well and compares it to the volume specified in the pipetting description. If sufficient volume is present in the well, the aspiration sequence is initiated (if sufficient volume is not present, the test is aborted and the test request moved to the exception list). (viii) The following occur simultaneously until the total volume of conjugate required is aspirated: (1) Pipette Z-axis motor is moved down at a rate of "x" stepε/εec. (2) Syringe aεpirateε "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (3) LLS is checked to ensure probe still in liquid. (ix) LLS is disabled. (x) Pipette Z-axis iε moved up to Z-clear position. (xi) Pipette R-axis is moved over the RV reagent well. (xii) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the dispense position within the RV reagent well. (xiii) Syringe dispenεes "X" μl of conjugate at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (xiv) -Pipette Z-axis is moved up to Z-clear position. (b) Probe post-waεh. The probe iε again waεhed to ensure that it is" ~ free from contamination as deεcribed in εection 6 (Sample kitting). 9. MEIA Buffer Kitting. (a) RV Carousel iε rotated until RV buffer well iε under the MEIA buffer diεpenεer at buffer kitting εtation. (b) "X" μl of MEIA buffer iε dispensed into the buffer well at a rate of "X" μl/εec F. TRANSFERRING RV INTO PROCESS AREA 1. RV carousel is rotated to transfer station. 2. Proceεε carousel is rotated so that the empty position is aligned with the tranεfer εtation. 3. Tranεfer mechaniεm 0-axiε iε rotated to εample entry area. 4. Tranεfer mechaniεm R-axis grabs the RV and pulls it into the transfer mechanism. 5. Transfer mechanism 0-axis iε rotated so that RV iε aligned with the empty position on the procesε carousel. 6. RV iε loaded onto proceεε carouεel. PROCESS AREA A. System waits . , for temperature equilibration time and evaporation window to expire. B. FIRST PIPETTE ACTIVITY (microparticle/εample reaction) 1. Incubation timer is set according to asεay file εpecifications. 2. MEIA buffer aspirate. (a) The procesε carousel is moved so that the RV is at the pipetting station. (b) Syringe aspirateε "X" μl of air at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (c) Pipette R-axiε iε moved over the RV buffer well. (d) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved down to the Z- above poεition over the RV buffer well. (e) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the Z- LLS position. (f) LLS iε enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (g) Pipette Z-axis is moved down at constant speed until fluid iε detected or until the Z-Asp limit is reached (it will be aεsumed that fluid is detected). (h) Baεed on the Z-height position at which fluid is detected and the Z-height/volume table, the System calculates the volume of fluid in the well and compares it to the volume specified in the pipetting description. If sufficient volume is present, the aspiration sequence is initiated (if sufficient volume is not present, the test is aborted and the test request moved to the exception liεt). (i) The following occur εimultaneously until the total volume of MEIA buffer required iε aεpirated: (1) Pipette Z-axis motor is moved down at a rate of "X" steps/sec. (2) Syringe aspirateε "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (j ) LLS is "checked to ensure probe still in liquid. ■ (k) LLS is disabled. (1) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to Z-above position. 3. Sample aspirate (a) Pipette R-axis iε moved over the RV εample well. (b) Pipette Z-axiε. iε moved down to the Z- LLS position. (c) LLS is enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (d) Pipette Z-axis is moved down at constant speed until fluid iε detected or until the Z-Asp limit is reached (it will be asεumed that fluid is detected). (e) Based on the Z-height position at which fluid iε detected and the Z-height/volume table, the εyεtem calculateε the volume of fluid in the well and compareε it to the volume εpecified in the pipetting description. If εufficient volume iε present, the aspiration sequence is initiated (if sufficient volume is not preεent, he teεt iε aborted and the teεt requeεt moved to the exception liεt). (f) The following occur εimultaneouεly until the total volume of εample required iε aεpirated: (1) Pipettor Z-axiε motor iε moved down at a rate of "X" εtepε/εec. (2) Syringe aεpirates "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (g) LLS iε checked to ensure probe still in liquid. (h) LLS is disabled. (i) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to Z-above position. 4. MEIA buffer and sample are added to microparticleε in incubation well. (a) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved down to the diεpense position within the RV incubation well. (b) Syringe diεpenεeε "X" μl of MEIA buffer and sample at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (c) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved .up to Z-clear position. 5. Probe post-wash. The probe is again washed to ensure that it is free from contamination as described in section 6 (Sample kitting). C. CARTRIDGE LOAD (This activity occurs when resources are not in use) 1. Move the auxiliary carouεel εo that reserved position iε under feeder. 2. Cycle trap-door meσhaniεm to load flaεhlight into carouεel. 3. Cycle εhuttle mechaniεm to place another MEIA cartridge on trap door (for next tab load). 4. Check incubation timer. When expires start next pipetting. D. SECOND. PIPETTE ACTIVITY (tranεfer of reaction mixture to matrix) 1. Incubation timer iε set according to asεay file εpecificationε. 2. Buffer aεpirate. (a) The proceεε σarouεel iε moved εo that the RV iε at the pipetting εtation. (b) Syringe aεpirateε "X" μl of air at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (c) Pipette R-axis iε moved over the RV buffer well. (d) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the Z- above position. (e) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the Z- LLS poεition. (f) LLS iε enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (g) Pipette Z-axis is moved down at constant speed until fluid iε detected or until the Z-Aεp limit iε reached (it will be assumed that fluid is detected). (h) Based on the Z-height position at which fluid iε detected and the Z-height/volume table, the εyεtem calculateε the volume of fluid in the well and compareε it to the volume εpecified in the pipetting deεcription. If εufficient volume iε preεent, the aεpiration εequenσe iε initiated (if εufficient volume is not present, the test is aborted and the test request moved to the exception list). (i) The following occur simultaneouεly until the total volume of buffer required iε aεpirated: (1) Pipette Z-axiε motor iε moved down at a rate of "X" εtepε/sec. (2) Syringe aspirateε "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (j ) LLS is checked to ensure probe still in liquid. (k) LLS is disabled. (1) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to the Z- above position. 3. Reaction mixture aspirate. (a) .Pipette R-axis iε moved over the RV incubation well. (b) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the Z- LLS position. (c) LLS is enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (d) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved down at conεtant εpeed until fluid iε detected or until the Z-Aεp limit iε reached (it will be aεεumed that fluid iε detected). (e) Baεed on the Z-height poεition at which fluid iε detected and the Z-'height/volume table, the system calculates the volume of fluid in the well and compareε it to the volume εpecified in the pipetting deεcription. If εufficient volume iε preεent, the aspiration sequence iε initiated (if sufficient volume is not present, the test is aborted and the teεt requeεt moved to the exception liεt). (f) The following occur εimultaneouεly until the total volume of reaction mixture required is aspirated: (1) Pipette Z-axis motor is moved down at a rate of "X" stepε/εec. (2) Syringe aspirates "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (g) LLS iε checked to enεure probe εtill in liquid. (h) LLS iε diεabled. (i) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to the Z- clear position. 4. Reaction mixture dispense onto matrix. (a) The following are performed simultaneously and concurrently with the reaction mixture aspirate (above): (i) The auxiliary carousel iε moved so that the cartridge is at the pipetting station. (ii) Pipette R-axiε is moved over the MEIA cartridge (matrix) surface. (iii) Pipette Z-axiε is moved down to the matrix dispenεe poεition. (iv) Syringe diεpenεeε "X" μl of reaction mixture at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (v) Syεtem delayε "X" seconds until reaction mixture has been absorbed by matrix. 5. Buffer waεh of matrix. (a) Syringe dispenses "X" μl of buffer at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (b) Pipette Z-axiε iε moved . up to the Z- clear position. 6. Probe post-wash. The probe is again washed to ensure that it iε free from contamination aε deεσribed in εeσtion 6 (Sample kitting). 7. When incubation timer expireε, next pipette activity beginε. E. THIRD PIPETTE ACTIVITY (conjugate addition) 1. Incubation timer iε set according to aεεay file specifications. 2. Conjugate aspirate. (a) The prbcesε carouεel iε moved* so that the RV is at the pipetting station. (b) Syringe aspirates "X" μl of air at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (c) Pipette R-axiε is moved over the RV reagent 1 (conjugate) well. (d) Pipette Z-axiε is moved down to the Z- above position. (e) LLS is enabled to ensure no liquid currently detected. (f) Pipette Z-axis is moved down at constant speed until fluid is detected or until the Z-Asp limit is reached (it will be asεumed that fluid iε detected). (g) Baεed on the Z-height poεition at which fluid iε detected and the Z-height/volume table, the Syεtem calculateε the volume of fluid in the well and compareε it to the volume εpecified in the pipetting description. If sufficient volume is present, the aspiration sequence is initiated (if sufficient volume is not present, the test is aborted and the test request moved to the exception list). (h) The following occur εimultaneouεly until the total volume of conjugate required iε aεpirated: (i) Pipette Z-axis motor is moved down at a rate of "X" stepε/εec. (ii) Syringe aεpirateε "X" μl at a rate of "X" μl/εec. (i) LLS iε checked to enεure probe εtill in liquid. (j ) LLS is disabled. (k) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to the Z- clear position. 3. Conjugate dispense (performed simultaneously). (a) The auxiliary carousel is moved so that the cartridge is at the pipetting station. (b) Pipette R-axis is moved over the cartridge (matrix) surface. (c) Pipette Z-axis is moved down to the matrix dispense position. (d) Syringe dispenseε "X" μl of conjugate at a rate of "X" μl/sec. (e) Pipette Z-axis is moved up to the Z- clear position. (f) Wait "X" seconds until reaction mixture has been absorbed by matrix. 4. Probe post-waεh. The probe iε again waεhed to ensure that it is free from contamination as described in section 6 (Sample kitting). F. RV UNLOAD (This activity occurs when resourceε are not in uεe) 1. The following are performed εimultaneouεly: (a) Proceεε carouεel iε rotated εo that the empty poεition iε at the tranεfer εtation. (b) Tranεfer mechanism 0-axis iε moved to proceεε carouεel. 2. RV iε grabbed with the tranεfer mechaniεm R- axiε and pulled into the tranεfer mechaniεm. 3. Tranεfer mechaniεm 0-axis is rotated so that RV is aligned with the waste container. 4. RV is pushed into the waste container. 5. Check incubation timer. When expires start next activity. G. PREREAD ACTIVITY PERIOD (allotted time 378). The MEIA optics system 361 simultaneouεly performε the following activitieε in reεponεe to the εcheduler 256 and the optiσε control εyεtem 248 as described above in more detail: 1. The auxiliary carouεel 64 poεitionε the • cartridge 68 for a reading. 2. The gain of the PMT 374 is set. 3. The intenεity of the lamp 364 is increased from the simmer state to the burn state. H. MATRIX WASH 1. Auxiliary carouεel is rotated so that the cartridge iε at the matrix wash station. 2. The following stepε are repeated until all the buffer εpecified in the aεεay file for cartridge waεh haε been diεpensed. (a) "X" μl of heated MEIA buffer are diεpensed in 50μl cycles at a rate of "X" μl/εec onto the matrix. (b) Wait "n" seconds. I. MUP DISPENSE 1. Auxiliary carousel is rotated so that the cartridge is at the MUP station. 2. 50μl of heated MUP are diεpenεed at a rate of "X" μl/εec onto the matrix. 3. Wait "n" εeconds. J. READ SEQUENCE PERIOD (allotted time 376). The MEIA optics system 361 then performs the following in response to the scheduler 256 and the optics control syεtem 248 as described above: 1. A predetermined number of sub-reads specified in the asεay file specifications (usually 8) are sensed by the PMT 374. 2. After each sub-read except the last one, the optics εyεtem 361 pauεeε during the dwell time. 3. The OSP 254 convertε the digitized analog εignals from the PMT 374 to normalized readings by comparing the intensity at the detector 366 to the intensity of the lamp 364 ("normalized readings"). 4. The raw reads are converted to normalized reads (light intensity hitting detector/lamp intenεity) by the optics microprocesεor. 5. A rate iε calculated by the Syεtem from the normalized read vs time. 6. For quantitative asεays, the rate is fitted to a calibration curve to yield a concentration result. 7. For qualitative asεays, the sample rate is compared to an index or cutoff rate to determine if the sample is positive or negative (or reactive or nonreactive). K. CARTRIDGE UNLOAD (This activity occurs when resources are not in use) 1. Auxiliary carousel is rotated so that cartridge 'is at the ejector station. 2. Ejector is cycled to place cartridge into waste container. Schematic reaction sequences are presented in FIGS. 26, 27 and 28 which are typical of assays that can be handled by the automated immunoasεay analytical εyεtem of the invention. In FIG. 26, a T4 aεεay, FPIA εequence 1420, iε preεented wherein Step 1, T4 bound by thyroxine binding protein (TBP) 1424, iε reacted with T4 displacing agent 1426 to yield TBP 1428 plus unbound T4 (1430). In εtep 2, the T4 (1430) iε added to T4 antibody 1432 which yieldε a reaction product 1434 (T4 antibody-T4 complex). In Step 3, the T4 antibody-T4 complex 1434 iε treated with T4 tracer (fluoreεcent) 1436 which yieldε a fluoreεσent polarization measurable reaction product 1438. In FIG. 27, a εche atic reaction εequence 1440 for a 1-step sandwich MEIA determination (ferritin) is presented. In Steps 1 and 2 an anti-ferritin alkaline phosphatase conjugate is mixed with ferritin sample 1444 and anti-ferritin microparticles 1446 to yield a ferritin antibody-antigen-antibody complex 1448. In step 3, the antibody-antigen-antibody complex 1448 is reacted with 4-methylumbelliferyl phosphate (MUP) 1450 which yieldε methylumbelliferone (MU) which iε fluoreεcent. The rate of MU production iε meaεured. In FIG.' 28, the εchematic reaction εequence 1456 for a 2-εtep εandwich MEIA iε provided for HTSH aεsay. Anti-hTSH specific microparticles 1458 are added to the HTSH sample 1460 which provides a reaction product HTSH antibody-antigen complex 1462. In Steps 2 through 4, the complex 1462 iε combined with an anti-hTSH alkaline phoεphatase 1464 yielding hTSH antibody-antigen- antibody complex 1466. In step 5, the complex 1466 is reacted with MUP 1450 to yield MU which is fluorescent. The rate of MU production is measured. In accordance with the embodiments of the present invention, the automated immunoasεay analytical system provides apparatus, software, hardware and procesε technology for performing a multitude of aεεayε continuouεly and with random acceεs being available to the operator. The utilization of carousel pipettor technology for kitting and pipetting operations at either the main carousel or the process carousel, depending on the scheduled test, provides scheduling flexibilities heretofore unachievable. The inventive syεtem allows for a commonality of kitting and pipetting for either immuno precipitation or competitive immunoaεεay technologies utilizing a common main carouεel, tranεfer station, first kitting and pipetting probe and process carousel as well as a second pipetting probe before separating into respective apparatus and procesε requirements. Also shared is the commonality of cabinetry diεpoεal and εupply materialε aε well aε a common computer network for scheduling, testing, kitting and pipetting. It will be seen that multiple asεays can be performed with a minimum of operator input or handling on the syεtem and the εyεtem can be utilized for other proceεεeε and aεεayε which have not been directly discussed but will be readily apparent to one practiced in the art in view of the above invention disclosure and the claims. It will also be appreciated that although particular embodimentε of the present invention have been discloεed, variouε changes and adaptationε to the apparatuε and methodε can be made without departing from the teachingε of the εpecification and scope of the invention as set out in the following claims.

Claims: What iε Claimed Iε: 1. An automated analytical εyεtem for performing immunoassays, comprising: kitting means for selectively creating dose containers holding liquid sampleε and reagentε; proceεεing meanε for εelectively combining εaid liquid εampleε and εaid reagentε in εaid doεe containerε to effect εelect assay reactions; means for selectively tranεferring εaid doεe containerε created by said kitting meanε to said procesεing means, said meanε for εeleσtively tranεferring being operably integrated with εaid kitting meanε and εaid proceεsing means; means for εcheduling, operating to control εaid proceεεi-ng meanε and εaid meanε for εelectively tranεferring in order to optimize, by quality and quantity, εaid εelect assay reactions effected, said means for scheduling operates independent of occurrences at said kitting means but reεpondε to vary control of εaid proceεεing meanε and εaid means for selectively transferring at each interval in which εaid doεe containerε created by εaid kitting meanε are altered in any manner from time to time during εyεtem operation; and meanε for analyzing each of εaid εelect aεεay reactionε effected. 2. The εyεtem of claim 1, wherein εaid means for scheduling alεo operateε to control εaid meanε for analyzing in order to also optimize, by quality and quantity, analyses of said εelect aεεay reactionε. 3. The εyεtem of claim 1, wherein said dose containerε are dispoεable reaction vesselε which are loaded by εaid kitting means with εaid liquid εampleε and said reagents, said loading being selectively controlled as desired by an operator of said system. 4. The system of claim 1, wherein said procesεing means includes incubation means for maintaining said....εeleσt asεay reactions at select temperatures for performing applicable immunoassays. 5. The syεtem of claim 2, wherein at least two asεay procedureε are performed by εaid system with each of said liqui-d sampleε of each of εaid reagentε of each of εaid doεe containerε. 6. The εyεtem of claim 3, wherein εaid diεposable reaction vesεels, once loaded at said kitting means, are transferred to said procesεing meanε by εaid means for selectively transferring. 7. The system of claim 6, wherein said processing means includes a pipetting means for adding said reagents to said liquid samples, said reagents and said liquid sampleε being variably poεitionable with reεpect to εaid pipetting meanε to enable εaid εelective combining of εaid liquid εampleε and said reagents at εaid processing means. 8. The syεtem of claim 1, wherein εaid immunoaεsayε performable by εaid εyεtem are selected from the group consisting of microparticle enzyme immunoasεay, fluoreεcence polarization immunoaεεay, and ion capture immunoaεεay. 9. The system of claim 1, wherein said system can perform both heterogeneous immunoasε-ayε and homogeneouε immunoassays. 10. The syεtem of claim 1, wherein εaid meanε for analyzing iε capable of performing analyεeε selected from the group consiεting of optical fluorescence analysiε and chemilumineεcenσe analyεiε. 11. An automated analytical system for procesεing immunoaεεayε, εaid automated analytical εyεtem compriεing: kitting meanε for εelectively creating a plurality of kits, each of said kits holding liquid sampleε and reagentε; proceεεing meanε for εelectively proceεεing said liquid sampleε and εaid reagentε by combining εaid liquid samples and said reagents in said kits to cause selected aεεay reactionε; tranεferring meanε for εelectively tranεferring εaid kitε from said kitting meanε to εaid procesεing meanε, said transferring meanε _ being operably integrated with εaid kitting meanε and εaid proceεεing means; analyzing meanε for performing a plurality of analyses to determine the effect of said selected assay reactions; scheduling means for controlling the integrated operation of said processing means, said transferring means, and said analyzing means, in response to occurrences at said kitting means, said scheduling means optimizing, by quality and quantity, said selected assay reactions. 12. An automated, continuous and random access analytical system apparatus capable of simultaneously performing multiple asεayε of a plurality of liquid εampleε, said apparatus comprising: a front end carousel assembly inclusive- of a sample cup carousel, a reagent pack carousel and a reaction vessel carousel mounted concentrically; kitting means for kitting a reaction veεεel poεitioned in sai reaction vesεel carouεel, said kitting means further including a transfer pipetting means positioned adjacent said front end carousel asεembly for transferring a liquid εample from εaid εample cup carouεel and reagents from said reagent pack carouεel to said reaction vesεel without initiation of an assay reaction sequence; a proceεε carouεel poεitioned within a controlled environment having environment means for maintaining said controlled environment within a predetermined temperature; a transfer station having meanε for transferring εaid kitted reaction veεεel from said reaction veεεel carousel to said procesε carousel; a proceεε carouεel tranεfer meanε for transferring and mixing reagents with said liquid sample in said kitted reaction veεεel to form a reaction mixture; at leaεt two different aεεay readerε, at leaεt one of εaid aεεay readerε poεitioned adjacent εaid proceεε carouεel for detecting εaid reaction mixture; meanε for transferring said reaction mixture from said proceεε carouεel to a reaction cartridge contained in a cartridge wheel carouεel, another one of εaid aεεay readers positioned adjacent said cartridge wheel carousel for detecting said reaction mixture in εaid cartridge; meanε for tranεferring εaid reaction veεεel from εaid proceεε carouεel to εaid transfer εtation, εaid tranεfer εtation having removing means for removing said reaction veεεel from εaid εyεtem; and meanε for removing εaid cartridge from εaid cartridge wheel carouεel. 13. An apparatuε according to claim 12 εaid cartridge wheel carouεel containing multiple diεpoεable cartridges, said apparatus further comprising means for supplying said cartridges to said cartridge wheel carousel and disposing of said cartridges " from the cartridge wheel carousel. 14. The apparatus according to claim 12 wherein said aεεay reader include means for optically monitoring said reaction mixture. 15. The apparatus according to claim 12 wherein said asεay reader provideε calibration recording means for said reaction mixture. 16. The apparatus according to claim 12 wherein the transfer station transfer means iε comprised of a carousel rotatable about an axis, an arm with a pick for mating with a reaction vesεel tranεfer projection meanε and meanε for pulling the reaction veεεel from the front end carouεel, rotating and placing the reaction veεεel onto the proσeεε carouεel through rotation and rack and pinion movement of the pick arm. 17. The apparatuε according to claim 12 wherein the εample handling meanε and reagent handling meanε include meanε for identifying εaid liquid εampleε and liquid reagentε from coded information associated with sample cupε in εaid εample cup carouεel and reagent packε in εaid reagent pack carouεel. 18. The apparatuε according to claim 12 which further includeε meanε to store output readings of said asεay reader. 19. The apparatus according to claim 12 which further includeε meanε to calculate the concentration of an analyte from output readings of said aεεay reader. 20. The apparatuε according to claim 12 wherein the reaction veεεel containε a reaction cuvette having a physical characteristic of low birefringence through an optical read region. 21. An automated, continuous and random access analytical syεtem capable of εimultaneouεly performing multiple aεεayε of a plurality of liquid εample, said syεtem compriεing: a front end carousel assembly inclusive of a sample cup, a reagent pack carousel and a reaction vesεel carouεel, εaid reaction veεεel carouεel being concentrically mounted exterior of said reagent pack carousel and εaid reagent pack carousel being concentrically mounted exterior of said sample cup carouεel; a proceεε carousel, said procesε carousel having environmental means for maintaining said process carousel within a predetermined temperature and timing of reaction incubation; a cartridge wheel carousel, εaid cartridge wheel carousel offset from said procesε carousel; means for rotating the respective carousels to align with a kitting pipettor means for kitting a reaction vessel positioned in said reaction vessel carousel to form a kitted reaction vessel therein without initiation of an assay reaction sequence; means for transferring said kitted reaction vessels • from said reaction vessel carousel to a transfer station, said transfer station having means for transferring said kitted reaction vesεel to εaid proceεε carousel; tranεfer pipettor means for transferring and mixing reagents within said reaction vesεel positioned in said process carousel to form a reaction mixture therein, and for transferring said reaction mixture from εaid reaction veεεel in εaid proceεε σarouεel to said cartridge wheel carousel; εaid cartridge wheel carouεel further including meanε for receiving said reaction mixture from said procesε carousel, and means for supplying cartridges to said cartridge wheel carousel; εaid proceεε carouεel further having integrated therewith a fluoreεcent polarization immunoaεεay reader and a firεt proceεεing εtation; εaid cartridge wheel proceεε carouεel further having integrated therewith a microparticle enzyme immunoaεεay reader and a second procesεing εtation; means for removing said reaction vesεel from εaid proceεs carousel by operation of said transfer station; means for removing said cartridges from said cartridge wheel carousel; and means for analyzing said reaction mixture either by fluorescent polarization immunoaεεay reader or microparticle enzyme immunoaεεay reader. 22. The εyεtem according to claim 21 wherein εaid aεsay readers include means for optically monitoring said reaction mixture. 23. The system according to claim 21 wherein said asεay readerε including calibration meanε and recording meanε for εaid reaction mixture. 24. The εyεtem according to claim 21 wherein the tranεfer station transfer means . iε compriεed of a. carouεel rotatable about an axiε, an arm with a pick for mating with a reaction veεεel tranεfer projection meanε and means for pulling the reaction vesεel from the front end carousel asεembly, rotating and placing the reaction vesεel onto the proσeεs carousel through rotation and rack and pinion movement of the pick arm. 25. The εyεtem according to claim 21 wherein εample cupε in εaid εample cup carousel and reagent packs in said reagent pack carousel include means for identifying said liquid samples and liquid reagents from coded information aεsociated with εaid εample cupε and the reagent packs. 26. The system according to claim 21 which includes means to store output readings of said asεay readers. 27. The system according to claim 21 which includes means to calculate the concentration of an analyte from output readings of said assay readerε. 28. The εyεtem according to claim 21 wherein the εample cup iε free εtanding on a εample cup baεe when εeparated from the εample cup carouεel. 29. A method for performing immunoaεεayε, comprising the steps of: creating dose containers holding liquid sampleε and reagentε; combining said liquid εampleε and εaid reagentε in εaid doεe containerε to effect εelect aεεay reactionε; εcheduling εaid combining step in order to optimize, by quality and quantity, εaid εelect aεεay reactionε effected; and analyzing each of εaid εelect aεεay reactionε effected. 30. The method of claim 29, wherein εaid creating εtep iε performed at a kitting meanε and εaid combining εtep iε performed at a proceεεing meanε, εaid scheduling step dictates operation of said proceεεing means as said combining step is repeated: 31. The method of claim 29, further comprising the step of transferring said dose containers from said kitting means to said procesεing meanε. 32. The method of claim 31, wherein εaid scheduling step governs operation of said transferring step and said combining step in order to optimize, by quality and quantity, said select asεay reactions effected by said method. 33. The method of claim 32, wherein said scheduling step occurs upon the each occurrence of combining step. 34. The method of claim 33, wherein at least two aεεay proσedureε are performed via εaid method. 35. The method of claim 34, wherein εaid combining εtep performε an immunoaεεay selected from the group consiεting of microparticle enzyme immunoaεεay, fluoreεcence polarization immunoassay, and ion capture immunoasεay. 36. The method of claim 29, wherein εaid analyzing step is by analysis selected from the group conεisting of optical fluorescence analysis and chemiluminescence analysis. 37. The method of claim 29, said system including clinical apparatus employed to, at different times, contains a first test subεtanσe during a firεt testing step and a second test subεtanσe during a εecond teεting εtep εubεequent to εaid first testing step, further comprising the steps of: supplying a wash solution to said apparatus; varying quantity of said wash solution supplied to said apparatus; and controlling said step of varying to vary quantity of said wash solution in proportion to potential for contamination between said first test εubεtanσe and said second test subεtance contained in εaid apparatuε. 38. The method of claim 29, εaid system including clinical apparatus employed to, at different times, contains a first test εubεtance during a firεt teεting εtep and a εecond teεt εubεtance during a εecond testing step subεequent to said firεt teεting εtep, further compriεing the steps of: εupplying a waεh εolution to εaid apparatus; varying quantity of εaid waεh εolution εupplied to εaid apparatus; and controlling said step of varying to vary quantity of εaid waεh εolution in proportion to potential for contamination between εaid first test subεtance and εaid εecond teεt εubεtance contained in εaid apparatuε. 39. A method of operating an automated, continuouε and random acceεε analytical system capable of simultaneously effecting multiple asεayε of a plurality of livid εamples, comprising: scheduling various asεayε of a plurality of liquid εampleε; creating one or more unit doεe diεpoεables by separately transferring a first of said liquid samples and reagents to a reaction vesεel without initiation of an asεay reaction sequence; tranεferring one or more of εaid unit doεe disposables to a procesεing workεtation; mixing an aliquot of said firεt liquid εample with one or more of εaid reagentε at different timeε in said reaction vesεel to form a firεt reaction mixture; mixing aliquotε of the same or different one or more εampleε with one or more of εaid reagentε at different timeε in different reaction veεεels to form multiple, independently scheduled reaction mixtures; incubating said multiple reaction mixtures simultaneouεly and independently; performing more than one εcheduled aεεay on said reaction mixtures in any order in which more than scheduled assays are presented; and analyzing said incubated reaction mixtures independently and individually by at least two asεay procedures. 40. A method according to claim 39 wherein at least two different assays are scheduled to be performed on the system for a plurality of liquid sampleε, εaid method provideε εcheduling of εaid assays in advance of performance thereof, each asεay test definition containing several timing parameters with each activity of the assay test containing time valueε which scheduling useε to determine which resources of the syεtem and activity required by each of εaid asεays and the time period that said resources need. 41. A method according to claim 40 wherein the system is capable of allowing special priority handling through stat. procedure scheduling of specific sampleε, and wherein said stat procedure scheduling interrupts prior scheduling, allowing the syεtem to finiεh preparing asεayε on a current sample and then prepare to perform an asεay on the εample through a modification of the εcheduling. 42. A method according to claim 41 wherein calibration procedureε εcheduling is εcheduled as a stat procedure. 43. A method according to claim 40 wherein scheduling for performing as sayε maximizeε the number of aεεayε the εyεtem is capable of processing per unit time by allowing sufficient time gapε between aεεay protocol εtepε to enable other aεεay protocol εteps to be performed within such time gaps. 44. A method according to claim 41 wherein the scheduling procesε includes scheduling of each activity to be performed in an assay before the asεay iε kitted, and scheduling performance of each assay activity prior to its originally scheduled execution time, thus minimizing resource idle time. 45. A method according to claim 44 wherein asεay throughput iε increaεed in the εyεtem. 46. A method according to claim 44 wherein operating the automated continuous and random access analytical εyεtem includeε kitting a unit doεe dispoεable by εeparately tranεferring aεεay εampleε and reagentε to a reaction veεεel without initiation of an aεsay reaction sequence. 47. A method according to claim 39 wherein the aεεay performed on εaid reaction mixture in εaid reaction veεεel iε a homogeneous asεay. 48. A method according to claim 39 wherein the aεεay performed on εaid reaction mixture in εaid reaction veεεel is a heterogeneous asεay. 49. A method according to claim 39 wherein least two assays are immunoassays. 50. A method according to claim 49 wherein said immunoassays are comprised of MEIA and FPIA as says. 51. A method according to claim 39 wherein said analyzing step includeε optically monitoring said reaction mixtures. 52. A method according to claim 39 wherein said reaction mixtures are monitored by turbidimetric, σalorimetric, fluorometric or luminescent means. 53. A method according to claim 39 wherein partial initiation of an asεay reaction εequence iε achieved εimultaneously with the creating of the unit dose disposable. 54. A method according to claim 39 wherein the system achieves simultaneouε creation of unit doεe diεpoεableε, tranεferring of a unit doεe" diεpoεable reaction veεεel and mixing of a reaction mixture while incubating multiple reaction mixtureε and performing at leaεt one εcheduled aεεay and analysis simultaneouεly. 55. A method of operating an automated, continuouε and random acceεs analytical syεtem capable of εimultaneouεly effecting multiple aεεays of a plurality liquid sampleε, compriεing: introducing εample cupε, reagent packε, and reaction veεεelε for performing εaid assayε onto concentric carousels of a front end carousel, the reaction vesεels being introduced to an outer carousel; identifying the reagent packs and sample cups; scheduling the asεays; aligning., the sample cups and reagent packs with a reaction vessel at a kitting station by rotating the respective carouεelε; kitting a unit doεe disposable in a reaction vessel having multiple independent open chambers in accordance with the scheduled assay by transfer of the sample from the sample cup to a reaction vesεel chamber and tranεfer of specific reagents to separate reaction vesεel chambers from the reagent pack; ' transferring the kitted reaction vesεel to a proceεε carouεel which iε maintained under controlled environment conditionε; pipetting the εample and variouε reagents into a reaction well of the reaction vesεel, the amountε of reagent, εequencing of tranεfer and time spacing there between being predetermined by assay scheduling; incubating the pipetted sample and reagent mix; identifying and transferring the incubated mixture in the reaction well to one of at least two asεay analytical εtations; performing an analysis by reading the prepared reaction mixture and calibrating the reading; and recording the resulting asεay reading analyεiε. 56. A method according to claim 55 wherein the front end carouεel and the concentric carouεelε of the front end carouεel aε well as the process carousel are rotably dis ' poεed for bidirectional rotational motion about a vertical axiε. 57. A method according to claim 56 wherein the front end carouεel being capable of bidirectional motion provideε a bidirectional εhaking motion for εtirring or agitating reagent pack reagentε after a period of inactivity of the front end carouεel. 58. A method according to claim 55 wherein both kitting and partial initiation of an assay reaction sequence iε achieved εimultaneously creating a unit dose dispoεable within the reaction veεεel. 59. A method according to claim 55 wherein said asεay being performed on εaid reaction mixture in εaid reaction veεεel iε a heterogeneous asεay. 60. A method according to claim 55 wherein εaid aεεay being performed on εaid reaction mixture in εaid reaction veεεel iε a ho ogenouε aεεay. 61. A method according to claim 55 wherein at least two as εayε are immunoassays. 62. A method according to claim 61 wherein said immunoassays are comprised of a fluorescent polarization immunoassay and a microparticle immunoassay. 63. A method according to claim 62 wherein settling of the microparticles is subεtantially eliminated by providing a sufficient sucrose concentration to microparticle diluent ratio to achieve neutral denεity. 64. A method according to claim 62 wherein a FPIA reading sequence includeε lamp εimmer and full burn modes. 65. A method according to claim 62 wherein the kitted εample and reagentε are pipetted directly from the reaction veεεel on the proceεs carousel to a microparticle immunoaεεay matrix for optically monitoring εaid reaction mixtureε. 66. A method according to claim 55 wherein the reagent packε are provided with cloεure elements for avoiding reagent evaporation. 67. A method according to claim 66 wherein covering iε provided to the reagent packε when not in uεe to avoid evaporation of the reagentε. 68. A method according to claim 55 wherein pipetting functionε on the front end carouεel and pipetting functions on the process carousel are achieved by aspirating-dispensing, driven by an airless syringe pump. 69. A method of operating an automated, continuous and random accesε analytical εyεtem capable of εimultaneouεly effecting multiple aεεayε to determine the preεence or amount of a plurality of analyte of intereεt in a plurality of liquid εampleε, compriεing: εcheduling variouε assayε of a plurality of liquid sampleε; creating one or more unit doεe diεpoεables by separately transferring a first of said liquid sampleε and reagentε to a reaction ' veεεel without initiation of an asεay reaction εequence; tranεferring one or more of εaid unit doεe diεpoεableε to a proσeεεing workεtation; mixing an aliquot of εaid first sample with one or more of said reagents at different timeε in said reaction vesεel to form a firεt reaction mixture; mixing aliquotε of the same or different ones of said sampleε with one or more of said reagents at different times in different reaction vesεels to form multiple, independently scheduled reaction mixtures; incubating said multiple reaction mixtures simultaneously and independently; performing more than one scheduled assay on said reaction mixtures in any order in which said scheduled asεayε are preεented; and analyzing εaid incubated reaction ixtureε independently and individually by at leaεt two aεεay procedureε to" determine the presence or amount of one or more analyte of interests in said sampleε. 70. A device for washing clinical apparatus, said clinical apparatus being employed to, at different times, contain a first test substance during a first testing step and a second test substance during a second testing step subεequent to εaid firεt testing step, comprising: means for supplying a wash solution to said apparatus; means for varying quantity of said wash solution supplied to said apparatus; and means for controlling said means for varying quantity to cause-' εaid meanε for varying quantity to vary quantity of εaid waεh εolution in proportion to potential for contamination between εaid firεt teεt εubstance and said second test subεtance contained in said apparatus. 71. The device of claim 70, wherein said means for controlling is a control εyεtem operating to cause εaid meanε for varying to yield a normal waεh quantity unleεε a greater waεh quantity appearε neceεεarily baεed on contamination characteriεticε of εaid first teεt εubεtance and of εaid second test subεtanσe. 72. The device of claim 71, wherein εaid meanε for controlling iε a control εystem operating to cause said means for varying to yield a greater than normal wash quantity when necesεary based on contamination characteriεticε of εaid firεt teεt εubεtance and of εaid εecond teεt εubεtance. 73. The device of claim 72, wherein εaid greater than normal waεh quantity iε more than one wash. 74. The device of claim 72, wherein said greater than normal wash quantity is said normal waεh quantity followed by a super wash quantity. 75. The device of claim 74, wherein said contamination characteristicε of said first test substances and of said second test subεtance read by εaid meanε for controlling from a matrix εupplied by a uεer of εaid device, said matrix contains values related to said firεt test substance, said second test subεtance, and said potential contamination. 76. A method for washing clinical apparatus, εaid clinical apparatus being employed to, at di ' fferent times, contain a first test subεtance during a firεt teεting step and a second test subεtance during a εecond teεting εtep εubsequent to εaid first testing step, comprising the steps of: supplying a wash solution to εaid apparatus; varying quantity of* εaid wash solution supplied to said apparatuε; and controlling εaid εtep of varying to vary quantity, of said wash solution in proportion to potential for contamination between said first teεt substance and εaid εeσond teεt εubεtance contained in εaid apparatuε. 77. The εyεtem of claim 70, εaid syεtem including clinical apparatuε employed to, at different timeε, contain a firεt teεt εubεtance during a firεt testing step and a second test substance during a second testing step subsequent to said first testing step, further comprising: means for supplying a wash solution to said apparatus; means for varying quantity of said wash solution supplied-'to εaid apparatus; and means for controlling said means for varying quantity to cause said means for varying quantity to vary quantity of said wash solution in proportion to potential for contamination between said first test εubεtance and εaid εecond test substance contained in said apparatus. 78. The system of claim 70, said syεtem including clinical apparatus employed to, at different times, contain a first test εubεtanσe during a firεt teεting step and a second test substance during a second testing step εubεequent to εaid firεt teεting εtep, further comprising: means for supplying a wash solution to said apparatus; meanε for varying quantity of εaid waεh εolution εupplied to εaid apparatuε; and meanε for controlling εaid meanε for varying quantity to cauεe εaid meanε for varying quantity to vary quantity of εaid waεh εolution in proportion to potential for contamination between said first test subεtance and εaid εeσond test subεtance contained in εaid apparatuε. 79. A continuous automated analytical εyεtem for analyzing immunoasεayε, compriεing means for detecting a chemiluminescent signal produced by an immune complex. 80. The syεtem of claim 79, wherein εaid immunoaεεayε are homogeneouε immunoaεεayε. 81. The εystem of claim 79, wherein said immunoassays are heterogeneous immunoassays. 82. The syεtem of claim 79, wherein said immunoassays are selected from the group consisting of homogeneous immunoassays and heterogeneous immunoassayε. 83. The εyεtem of claim 79, wherein εaid chemilumineεσent εignal detected is produced by an immobilized immune complex comprising antibody coated magnetic particles separated by a magnetic field. 84. The syεtem of claim 79, wherein εaid chemilumineεcent εignal detected iε produced by an immobilized immune complex compriεing antibody coεted magnetic particleε εeparated by a porouε matrix. 85. An automated liquid level εenεing εyεtem for deteσting the preεenσe of liquid in a container, εaid liquid level εenεing εyεtem comprising: a vertically oriented, electrically conduσtive probe positioned above said container; meanε for vertically moving εaid probe into and out of εaid container; a εignal εource electrically connected to εaid probe, εaid εignal εource energizing εaid probe with an electrical εignal and cauεmg said probe to transmit said electrical signal; a receiving antenna positioned below said container for receiving said transmitted electrical signal; means for analyzing said received electrical signal for indications that said probe has contacted liquid in said container; meanε for tranεferring εaid received electrical signal from said receiving antenna to said analyzing meanε; and meanε for indicating that liquid haε been detected. 86. The automated liquid level εenεing εyεtem of claim 85 wherein εaid meanε for analyzing εaid received electrical εignal includeε: meanε for detecting changeε in received signal amplitude; and means for meaεuring the rate of change of εaid change in received signal amplitude. 87. The automated liquid level senεing εyεtem of claim 86 further compriεing meanε for comparing εaid received εignal amplitude to a predetermined threshold value. 88. The automated liquid level εensing system of claim 87 wherein said means for detecting changes in received signal amplitude includes: means for multiplying said received signal by a reference signal; and a low pass filter. 89. The automated liquid level sensing syεtem of claim 88 wherein εaid meanε for detecting changes in received signal amplitude further σompriseε: means for reducing said received signal amplitude to a value below εaid predetermined threεhold value when εaid received signal amplitude changeε εlowly; and meanε for passing εaid received signal to said means for comparing said received signal amplitude to a predetermined threshold value when said received signal amplitude changeε rapidly. 90. The automated liquid level εensing syεtem of claim 86 wherein εaid meanε for transferring said received electrical εignal from εaid receiving antenna to εaid analyzing meanε inσludeε a triax cable having an outer conductor, an inner εhield, and an inner conductor. 91. The automated liquid level εenεing εyεtem of claim 90 wherein εaid means for detecting changes in received signal amplitude includes means for ' reducing the effective capaσitance of said triax. cable. 92. The automated liquid level εenεing εyεtem of claim 91 wherein-εaid means for reducing the effective capaσitanσe of said triax cable includes a driven shield circuit connected to said inner shield of said triax cable, said circuit providing a buffer which drives εaid inner εhield. 93. The automated liquid level εenεing εyεtem of claim 85 further compriεing a fluid level εenεing sleeve, εaid εleeve channelling said electrical signal from said probe to said receiving antenna. 94. The automated liquid level senεing εyεtem of claim 93 wherein εaid εenεing εleeve is a conductive cylinder having first and εecond ends, said firεt end surrounding εaid liquid container, and said second end mounted adjacent said receiving antenna. 95. A method of automatically detecting the preεence of liquid in a σontainer, εaid method compriεing the stepε of: vertically poεitioning an electrically conduσtive probe above εaid container; vertically moving said probe into and out of said container; electrically connecting a signal source to said probe, said signal source energizing said probe with an electriσal signal and σausing εaid probe to transmit said eleσtriσal signal; positioning a receiving antenna below said container for receiving said transmitted electrical signal; analyzing said received electrical signal for indications that said probe has contacted liquid in said container; transferring said received electrical signal from said receiving antenna to said analyzing means; and indicating that liquid haε been detected. 96. The method of automatically detecting the presence of liquid in a container of claim 95 wherein said εtep of analyzing εaid received electriσal signal inσludes the stepε of: deteσting σhangeε in received εignal amplitude; and measuring the rate of change of said σhange in reσeived signal amplitude. 97. The method of automatically detecting the presence of liquid in a container of σlaim 96 further comprising the step of comparing said received signal amplitude to a predetermined threεhold value. 98. The method of automatiσally deteσting the preεenσe of liquid in a container of claim 97 wherein εaid εtep of detecting changes in reσeived signal amplitude includes the steps of: multiplying said reσeived signal by a referenσe signal; and passing said multiplied signal through a low pasε filter. 99. The method of automatiσally deteσting the preεenσe of liquid in a container of claim 98 wherein said εtep of detecting changeε in received εignal amplitude further comprises the steps of: reducing said received εignal amplitude to a value below εaid predetermined threεhold value when said reσeived signal amplitude σhanges εlowly; and paεεing εaid reσeived εignal to εaid means for σomparing said reσeived εignal amplitude to a predetermined threεhold value when εaid received εignal amplitude changeε rapidly. 100. The method of automatically detecting the preεence of liquid in a container of σlaim 96 wherein εaid εtep of tranεferring εaid received electriσal εignal from εaid reσeiving antenna to εaid analyzing means includes the step of transferring said signal over a triax cable having an outer conductor, an inner shield, and an inner conduσtor. 101. The method of automatiσally detecting the presence of liquid in a container of claim 100 wherein said step of detecting changes in received signal amplitude includes the step of reducing the effective capaσitanσe of said triax σable. 102. The method of automatiσally detecting the presence of liquid in a container of claim 101 wherein said step of reduσing the effeσtive capacitanσe of said triax σable inσludes the εtep of σonneσting a driven εhield circuit to εaid inner shield of said triax cable, said cirσuit providing a buffer which drives said inner shield. 103. The method of automatically detecting the presence of liquid in a container of claim 95 further comprising the step of channelling said electrical signal from said probe to said receiving antenna utilizing a σonduσtive fluid level sensing sleeve having firεt and εeσond endε. 104. The method of automatiσally deteσting the preεenσe of liquid in a σontainer of claim 103 wherein εaid εtep of channelling εaid eleσtriσal εignal from said probe to said reσeiving antenna inσludes the εteps of: surrounding said liquid σontainer with εaid firεt end of εaid εensing sleeve; and mounting said seσond end of εaid εenεing sleeve adjacent said receiving antenna. 105. A bubble flushing syringe for aspirating and dispenεing fluids through an open ended tip with precision and volumetriσ aσσuraσy, said apparatuε σompriεing: a piεton within a bore formed by a generally σylindriσal wall having a cloεed end and an open end, εaid piεton forming an annulus with the wall and closed end of the bore and capable of reciprocating therein; an annular seal seated in the open end of the bore and circumventing εaid piston to close the annulus sufficiently snug to retain fluid when said piston reciproσates there-through; inlet means for directing fluid to the annulus through the wall of the bore, and outlet means for directing fluid from the annulus through the wall of the bore to the open ended tip; and drive means connected to said piston for reciprocating εaid piεton within the bore; whereby fluid from εaid inlet meanε, when conneσted to a fluid εupply, flows around εaid piεton and through εaid outlet meanε to the open ended tip, thereby σreating a σroεε-flow pattern in the annulus around said piston aε it reciproσateε in the bore to fluεh bubbles through said outlet means. 106. The bubble flushing syringe aσσording to σlaim 105 wherein εaid inlet meanε and outlet means are proximal to εaid annular εeal and aligned generally axially about 180" apart. 107. The bubble fluεhing εyringe aσcording to claim 105 wherein εaid piεton haε a head of εimilar geometric εhape as the inside configuration of the closed end of the bore. 108. The bubble flushing syringe according to claim 107 wherein the head of said piεton iε dome- shaped. 109. The bubble flushing syringe according to claim 107 wherein the head of said piston, when said piston in its full inward extension position, is positioned sufficiently close to the cloεed end of the bore to disrupt any bubbles therein. 110. The bubble flushing εyringe aσσording to σlaim 107 wherein the head of εaid piεton, when εaid piεton iε in itε full outward extension poεition, iε εubεtantially flush with the seal between said inlet means and outlet meanε. 111. The bubble fluεhing εyringe aσσording to σlaim 105 wherein εaid inlet means is in communication with a pressurized sourσe of fluid. 112. The bubble fluεhing εyringe according to claim 105, wherein εaid drive meanε compriεeε: a frame having a base plate supporting opposed end plates, one of the end plates mounted adjaσent the open end of the bore; a σoupler εlidably mounted on the baεe of εaid frame to be axially movable within εaid frame between the end plateε thereof, εaid σoupler being connected to said piston; a motor mounted on the other end plate of said frame, said motor having a rotor coaxially aligned with said piston; and a lead sσrew rotationally coupled between the rotor of said motor and said coupler to axially move εaid σoupler in εaid frame, thereby reciprocating said piston when the rotor of said motor iε actuated. 113. The"bubble fluεhing aεpirating and dispensing syringe aσσording to σlaim 112 wherein the fluid inlet and fluid outlet means are positioned approximal to the seal means and the fluid inlet and fluid outlet means are poεitioned at about 180 * apart. 114. The bubble fluεhing aεpirating and diεpensing εyringe according to claim 112 wherein the reciproσating piεton haε a piston head of a similar geometry as the inside σonfiguration of the bore σlosed end. 115. The bubble fluεhing aεpirating and diεpensing syringe acσording to σlaim 114 wherein the piston head is domed-εhaped. 116. The bubble flushing aspirating and diεpenεing εyringe aσσording to σlaim 112 wherein the reσiproσating piεton in itε full inward extenεion poεition iε poεitioned εuffiσiently cloεe to touching the inside bore end to disrupt any bubbles in the bore end. 117. The bubble flushing aspirating and dispenεing εyringe acσording to claim 114 wherein the reciprocating piεton in itε full outward extenεion poεition from the bore end is positioned with the piεton head being fluεh with the εeal and poεitioned between the fluid inlet and fluid outlet meanε. 118. The bubble flushing aspirating and dispenεing εyringe acσording to claim 112 wherein the fluid inlet meanε iε in co muniσation with a preεεurized fluid source. 119. A method for flushing bubbles from an aspirating and dispensing syringe and a fluidics system utilizing such εyringe, which method σompriεeε the εtepε of: introduσing fluid into an annuluε defined by a piεton and bore wall, the annuluε σloεed at a firεt end of the bore by εeal means between the bore wall and the piεton and at a εeσond end of the bore by a σlosed bore end; flowing the fluid through the annulus around the sideε of the piston and out through a fluid outlet; σreating a σross flow pattern approximate to the εeal area aσroεε the end of the piεton in one poεition and around the piston when the piston is moving in or out of the bore; reciprocating the piston; and flushing bubbles from the fluidics syεtem through reciproσating of the piεton at least through one σomplete reσiproσation σyσle. 120. The method for flushing bubbleε from an aspirating and dispenεing syringe aσσording to σlaim 119 wherein creating the cross flow pattern approximate to the seal area across the end of the piston when the reciproσating piston is in a full outward extension position with the piston head being flush with the seal and around the piεton when the piεton iε moving in or out of the bore, flowing the fluid around the εideε of the piεton and reσapturing the fluid at a fluid outlet whiσh iε loσated approximately 180" from the fluid inlet. 121. The method for flushing bubbles from an aspirating and dispenεing syringe aσσording to σlaim 119 wherein bubbles near or on the σlosed bore end are diεrupted by the reσiproσating piεton in itε full inward extenεion poεition by poεitioning the end of the piεton εuffiσiently σloεe to touσhing the inεide bore end. 122. The method for fluεhing bubbleε from an aεpirating and diεpenεing εyringe aσσording to σlaim 119 wherein fluεhing of the bubbleε from the fluidiσs system through reciprocating of the piston for multiple reciproσation σyσles between eaσh aεpirating and diεpenεing function or automatically controlled at periodic multiples of the aspirating and dispenεing function. 123. The bubble flushing syringe according to claim 105, further comprising valve means connected to εaid inlet means for controlling the flow of fluid through said syringe. 124. A method of operating an automated, continuouε and random acσeεε anal tiσal εyεtem σapable of simultaneously effeσting multiple asεayε of a plurality liquid εampleε, σompriεing: introducing εample cupε, reagent packε, and reaction veεεelε for performing εaid aεεayε onto concentric carouεelε of a front end carouεel, the reaction vessels being introduced to an outer carousel; identifying the reagent packs and sample cups; εσheduling the assayε; aligning the εample σupε and reagent paσkε with a reaσtion veεεel at a kitting εtation by rotating the reεpeσtive σarousels; kitting a unit dose dispoεable in a reaσtion veεεel having multiple independent open σhamberε in aσcordance with the scheduled asεay by transfer of the sample from the sample cup to a reaction vessel chamber and transfer of specific reagents to εeparate "reaction veεsel chamberε from the reagent pack; tranεferring the kitted reaction veεsel to a proσesε σarouεel -whiσh iε maintained under σontrolled environment conditions; pipetting the εample and variouε reagentε into a reaction well of the reaction veεεel, the amountε of reagent, sequencing " of transfer and time spacing there between being predetermined by .assay scheduling; pipetting functionε on the front end carouεel and pipetting functions on the proσeεε σarouεel are aσhieved by a bubble fluεhing aεpirating and dispensing syringe; inσubating the pipetted sample and reagent mix; identifying and transferring the incubated mixture in the reaction well to one of at leaεt two asεay analytical stationε; performing an analyεiε by reading the prepared reaction mixture and calibrating the reading; and recording the resulting assay reading analysiε. 125. An automated, continuouε and random access analytical system apparatus capable of s . imultaneouεly effecting multiple aεεays of a plurality of liquid sampleε, compriεijαg: a front end carousel asεembly incluεive of a εample cup carousel, a reagent pack carousel and a reaction vesεel carouεel mounted conσentriσally and εerviσed by a tranεfer pipetting meanε in combination with a bubble fluεhing aεpirating and diεpenεing syringe suitable for kitting a reaction vesεel; a tranεfer εtation providing meanε for tranεferring a kitted reaction veεεel to a proceεε carouεel, the proceεε carouεel maintained within a controlled environment; a proceεε carouεel transfer pipetting means in combination with a bubble flushing aspirating and dispenεing εyringe εuitable for mixing reagentε with the εample in a reaction well of the reaction vessel; means for tranεferring the reεulting reaction mixture to one of at leaεt two aεεay reader meanε; means for transferring a reaσtion vesεelε from the aεεay reader to a tranεfer εtation; and meanε aεεoσiated with εaid tranεfer station for removing the diεposable reaction vessel from the system. 126. A teεt εample σontainer aεεembly for loading a plurality of teεt εampleε onto a teεt sample σarousel of an automated analytiσal syεtem, εaid aεεembly σompriεing: a housing with two parallel σurved sideε, εaid εideε having the εame radius of σurvature as the test sample σarousel; a top shelf with at least two openings for reσeiving test sample σontainers and a bottom" portion parallel to and spaσed apart from the top shelf, wherein said bottom portion and said σurved surfaσes define a σavity therebetween wherein the at least two openings provide a predefined vertiσal alignment; and said asεembly preεentε εaid mounted σupε with σup openings in a plane parallel with the plane of the asεembly εheif. 127. The aεεembly aσσording to σlaim 126 wherein the aεεembly haε handling means elevated above the plane of the shelf. 128. The aεεembly aσσording to claim 126, wherein opening and cup receiving εleeve receiving meanε define two rowε for reσeiving teεt εample σontainerε. 129. The aεεembly aσσording to σlaim 126, wherein the aεεembly haε mounting pinε mounted on the bottom for poεitioning and mounting εaid teεt εample σontainer segment assemblies in aligned position on the test sample carousel. 130. The asεembly according to claim 126, wherein the aεεembly bottom haε pin receiving openingε for poεitioning and mounting onto the teεt εample carouεel, εaid carouεel having pins expoεed for receiving the test sample container segment assembly. 131. The asεembly according to claim 126, wherein the aεεembly cavity has individual spring means for receiving and holding the test sample containers once inserted into the assembly. 132. The assembly according to claim 126, wherein the assembly has cup holding arms spaσed between the εhelf openings and the sleeves mounted on the bottom. 133. The assembly according to claim 126, wherein said cavity compriseε teεt sample σontainer receiving sleeveε mounted on the assembly bottom, said receiving sleeveε in alignment with the shelf openings for holding inserted test sample containerε. 134. A test sample tube segment aεsembly for loading a plurality of test samples contained in a plurality of test tubes onto a test sample carousel of an automated analytical syεtem, εaid assembly comprising: a housing with two parallel curved , sides, said εideε having the εame radiuε of curvature aε the teεt εample carousel; a top shelf with at least two openings for receiving test sample adaptor tubeε; the aεεembly having a bottom parallel to and εpaced apart from the top εhelf, wherein εaid bottom portion and εaid curved sideε define an aεsembly cavity therebetween, wherein said cavity having test sample tube adapter tube reσeiving sleeveε mounted on the aεεembly bottom, εaid reσeiving εleeves in axial alignment with the shelf openings for holding the inserted test tubes in a predefined vertiσal alignment; and wherein said assembly presents the open ends of the test tubeε in a parallel plane with the plane of the εhelf. 135. The aεεembly according to claim 134, wherein the aεsembly haε handling meanε elevated above the plane of the εhelf. 136. The aεεembly according to claim 134, wherein opening and tube receiving εleeve receiving means define two rows for receiving test sample tue adapter tubes. 137. The aεεembly according to claim 134, wherein the aεεembly haε mounting pins mounted on the bottom for positioning and holding said teεt εample tube segment asεemblieε in aligned poεition on the teεt εample σarouεel. 138. The aεsembly acσording to σlaim 134, wherein the asεembly bottom haε pin reσeiving openingε for poεitioning and mounting the aεεembly onto the teεt sample carousel, said carousel having pins exposed for receiving the test sample tube segment assembly. 139. The asεembly acσording to σlaim 134/ wherein the assembly cavity has individual spring means for receiving and holding the test sample tube adapter tubes once inserted into the aεεembly. 140. The aεεembly according to claim 134, wherein the assembly has test εample tube adapter tubeε holding arms spaσed between the εhelf openingε and the εleeveε mounted on " the bottom. 141. The aεεembly according to claim 134, wherein the teεt εample tube iε a Vacutainer® tube. 142. An automated, continuouε and random acσeεε analytiσal syεtem capable of εimultaneouεly effecting multiple aεεayε of a plurality of liquid samples, σomprising: a front end σarouεel aεεembly incluεive of test sample σontainer σarouεel, reagent pack carouεel and reaction veεεel carouεel, the reaction veεsel carousel being conσentrically mounted exterior of the reagent paσk σarouεel and the reagent pack carouεel being concentrically mounted exterior of the teεt εample container carouεel; a teεt sample container segment aεεembly meanε for loading multiple teεt sample σontainers on the teεt εample σarouεel, εaid asεembly σomprising (i) a housing with two parallel σurved sides, said sideε having the εame radius of curvature as the test εample carouεel, (ii) a top εhelf with at leaεt two -openingε for receiving teεt εample containers, (iii) a bottom parallel to and spaced apart from the top shelf defining with the curved surfaces therebetween a cavity, and (iv) wherein said bottom portion and said σurved surfaσeε define a σavity therebetween wherein the at leaεt two openingε provide a predefined vertiσal alignment σontainer with teεt εample σontainer openingε in a plane parallel with the plane of the aεεembly shelf; and meanε for rotating the reεpective carouεelε to align with a kitting pipettor meanε for kitting reaction veεεels; 143. The aεεembly according to claim 142, wherein εaid σavity compriεeε test εample container receiving εleeveε mounted on the asεembly bottom, εaid receiving εleeveε in alignment with the εhelf openings for holding inserted test sample σontainerε. 144. The εystem acσording to σlaim 142, wherein said syεtem comprises test sample handling meanε and reagent handling means, said test sample and reagent handling means compriεing meanε for identifying teεt εampleε and liquid reagents from coded information aεεociated with the εample σontainers and reagent packs. 145. A test sample container for use in an automated analytical εyεtem, εaid container compriεing modified tubular dimenεions within a tubular configuration, said test sample container having upper portion outer skirts for mounting said test sample container onto a test sample container assembly. 146. The σontainer aσcording to claim 145, wherein the container upper Portion and skirt have a greater outside diameter than the container lower Portion and skirt. 147. A test sample container adapter tube comprising a tube with an expanded upper portion outside diameter and open end cavity of sufficient length to receive a σylindriσal test, sample container. 148. The test sample container adapter tube according to claim 147, wherein said tube has a liquid level element comprising a conduσtive material capable of creating a capacitative path for capacitative lead εenεing means. 149. A reaction vessel suitable for multiple asεay utilization within an automated, σontinuouε and random aσσeεε analytical εyεtem which allowε for kidding of εample and reagentε and physical transfer of the kidded reaction vesεel to a proceεε carouεel, compriεing: multiple wellε of various volume capacities, the multiple wells having openingε on the same plane and depths extending from said plane the reaction vesεel having at leaεt one curvette, the -σurvette extending substantially below the multiple wells, the curvette having an opening on the same plane as the multiple wells; and at a transfer projection on a well bottom portion of the well on a first end portion of the reaction vesεel, the curvette projecting downward from a εecond end portion of the reaction veεεel. 150. The reaction veεεel acσording to claim 149 wherein the multiple wellε having various volume capacities and the εame or different well croεε εection and depth. 151. The reaction veεεel acσording to claim 149 wherein the multiple wellε and curvette have openings on the same plane and are joined on that plane by a platform having a thicknesε providing rigid εtrength to the multiple wellε and the σurvette. 152. The reaσtion veεεel aσcording to claim 151 wherein the platform, wellε and curvette are comprised of a single molded article wherein various well walls and curvette walls extending downwardly in a parallel direction from the platform define additional reinforcing material of construσtion for rigidity purposes. 153. The reaction vesεel according to claim 149 wherein the curvette is construσted with an- optical reader region characterized by low birefringence. 154. An automated, continuous and random access analytical syεtem apparatus capable of multiple assays of a plurality of liquid samples, comprising: a front end carousel aεsembly inσlusive of εample σup σarouεel, a reagent paσk σarouεel and a reaction ve'sεel carouεel mounted conσentriσally and εerviσed by a tranεfer pipetting means suitable for kidding a reaσtion vesεel; the reaσtion veεεel having multiple wellε of various capacities and at least one curvette, the curvette extending subεtantially below the multiple wellε; a well on a firεt end portion of the reaction vesεel having a tranεfer projection on a bottom portion, the curvette projecting downward from a εecond end portion of the reaction veεεel εubstantially beyond the projection depths of the multiple wellε, the multiple wellε and curvette extending from openings on the same plane, the projections being perpendicular to that plane; a transfer station providing means for transferring a kidded reaction vesεel through utilization of the well transfer projection to a procesε carouεel, the process carouεel maintained within a controlled environment; a proσeεε carouεel transfer pipetting means suitable for mixing reagentε with the sample in a reaction well of...the reaction vesεel; means for transferring the resulting reaσtion mixture to one of at least two asεay reader means; means for transferring a reaσtion vessel through use of the well transfer projeσtion from the asεay reader to a tranεfer εtation; and meanε aεεoσiated with εaid tranεfer εtation for removing the diεpoεable reaction veεεel from the system. 155. A method of operating an automated, continuous and random access analytical system capable of simultaneouεly effecting multiple aεεayε of a plurality liquid εampleε , comprising: introduσing εample cupε, reagent packs and reaction vessels for performing said asεayε on concentric σarouselε of a front end σarouεel, the reaσtion veεselε being introduσed to an outer carousel; identifying the reagent packs and sample cups; εcheduling the aεεayε; aligning εample cupε and reagent packε with a reaction veεεel indicating the εtation by rotating the reεpective σarouεelε; kitting a unit doεe disposable in a reaction vesεel having multiple independent open chamberε in acσordanσe with the εσheduled assay by transfer of the sample from the εample cup to a reaσtion veεsel σhamber and transfer of εpeσific reagentε to εeparate reaction vessel chambers from the reagent packs; transferring the kidded reaction vesεel to a proσess carousel which iε maintained under σontrolled environment σonditionε by means of a tranεfer εtation and uεe of a tranεfer projection on a bottom portion of a reaσtion veεsel well whiσh is exposed by the reaction veεsel carouεel at the circumference of the carouεel; pipetting the εample and various reagents into a reaσtion well of the reaction vesεel, the amounts of reagent, sequencing of transfer and time spacing therebetween being predetermined by aεεay εcheduling; incubating the pipetted εample and reagent mix; identifying and transferring the inσubated mixture in the reaσtion well to one of at least two asεay analytiσal εtationε; performing an analyεiε by reading the σompared reaσtion mixture and σalibrating the readingε; and reσording the reεulting aεεay reading analyεis. 156. The method according to claim 155- wherein both pipetting and partial initiation of an asεay reaction εequence iε achieved εimultaneously be creating a unit dose dispoεable within the reaction vesεel followed by tranεfer of the reaction veεεel to the proceεε carouεel. 157. The method according to claim 155 wherein the scheduled asεay iε FPIA and the FPIA read iε through the reaction veεεel curvette. 158. The method acσording to σlaim 155 wherein the reaction vesεel iε tranεferred by meanε of a tranεfer εtation which pulls the reaction veεεel from the front end carouεel reaction vessel carousel by a pick means which mates with the tranεfer projection means, the transfer station rotating and placing the reaction vesεel onto the proceεε carouεel through rotation movement of the pick arm. 159. The method aσσording to σlaim 158 wherein the transfer station tranεfer meanε removeε the reaσtion veεεel from the proσeεε σarouεel by pulling the reaction veεεel from the procesε carouεel to the tranεfer εtation by meanε of mating a pick with the reaction vessel transfer projection and pulling the reaction vessel from the process carousel and rotating the transfer station to a position allowing disposal of the used reaction vessel. 160. A reaction vessel paσkaging • and loading deviσe, comprising a semi-rigid plaεtic εtrip having an upper portion handling ledge, the ledge having cut-outε between reaction veεεel mounting zoneε, the εtrip defining a continuouε wall with the εtrip having a lower portion mounted with reaction veεεel mounting means, the mounting means capable of mounting multiple reaction vesselε on one continuouε εtrip through utilization of flexible leg portionε extending from the εtrip lower portion, the leg portionε having generally flat εurfaceε with each leg having mounted thereon a fin εet, the fins projecting perpendicular from each εide of the leg portion. 161. The reaction veεεel handling device acσording to σlaim 160 wherein the flexible εubεtantially flat leg portionε are separated but utilized in pairs along with the fins mounted perpendiσularly to the leg portion εurfaσeε for inεertion into a reaσtion veεεel well whiσh haε a σroεε seσtion aσσommodating the leg portions and fins in a sliding σontaσt mode. 162. The reaσtion vessel handling device acσording to σlaim 160 wherein the reaσtion vesεel handling deviσe iε utilized for loading multiple reaσtion veεεelε onto the reaction veεεel carouεel, the εemi- rigid εtrip continuous wall iε bendable to form an arc which matcheε the radius of the carousel. 163. The reaction vesεel handling deviσe aσσording to claim 162 wherein the arc through continuous wall with attached reaction vesεels iε positioned and snapped into the reaction vesεel carouεel reception openingε and the reaction vessel handling device is removed from the reaction vesεelε by an upward motion εliding the device mounting meanε from contaσt in the open well, the reaction veεεel being held in a εnapped poεition on the reaction veεεel σarouεel. 164. An automated, continuous and random access analytical syεtem apparatuε capable of multiple assayε of a plurality of liquid εampleε, σompriεing: a front end carouεel asεembly incluεive of a εample cup carouεel, a reagent pack carouεel and a reaσtion veεεel σarouεel mounted σoncentrically and εerviσed by a tranεfer pipetting meanε εuitable for kidding a reaσtion vessel; a reaction vesεel loading device allowing loading of multiple reaction vesselε into the reaction veεεel carouεel, the device having a continuous strip wall whiσh is flexible for arcing the device and the attached reaσtion vesεelε to matσh the curve radius of the reaction vessel carousel for contaσt and snapping the reaction vessels into the reaction vessel carousel and withdrawing of the reaction vessel loading device and device mounting means which are slidably inserted into a reaction vessel well having a mateable opening with the mounting means which provides fins and two separate legs which when inserted ' into the reaction vesεel well opening or εlightly compressed creating any spring load attachment; a transfer station providing means for transferring a kidded reaction vesεel to a process carousel, the process carousel maintained within a control environment; proceεε carouεel transfer pipetting means εuitable for mixing reagentε with the εample in a reaction well of the reaction vessel; means for transferring the resulting reaσtion mixture to one of at least two asεay reader means; means for transferring a reaσtion vessel from the assay reader to a transfer station; and means assoσiated with said transfer station for removing the disposable reaσtion veεεel from the εyεtem. 165. A method for loading multiple reaction veεεelε into a reaction carouεel of an automated, continuouε and random acceεε analytical system capable of simultaneouεly affecting multiple aεεays of a plurality of liquid sampleε, compriεing: having multiple reaction veεεelε removably mounted on mounting means of a reaction vessel loading device strip, the strip having a σontinuous wall and being inflexible along said wall; positioning the reaσtion vessel loading deviσe strip and removably attaσhed reaσtion vesεels thereon over -a. reaσtion vesεel carouεel; arcing the loading device strip along the strip continuous wall to εubεtantially perform with the radius of curvature of the reaction vessel carousel; inserting the multiple reaction veεεelε into respective εlots on the reaction vesεel carouεel; εnapping the reaσtion veεεelε into poεition into a holding meanε on the reaσtion veεεel carousel and removing the slidably mounted reaσtion vesselε from the reaction loading device εtrip by withdrawing the εtrip from the reaction vesselε. 166. A reaction vesεel loading device for loading a plurality of reaction veεεels onto a reaction veεsel carousel, said reaction vesεel loading device comprising a semi-rigid planar cover having an upper planar surface with spaced apart vessel insert depresεions which are insertable into reaction vessel openingε, said depressions providing a projection for at least one reaction vessel well and cuvette opening, said projections being aligned to fit into said well and cuvette opening for affixing reaction vessels onto the reaction vesεel loading deviσe, the mounted reaσtion veεεelε on the reaσtion veεsel loading device being appropriately spaced and aligned for insertion loading into a reaction vessel carousel, the reaction vesεel loading, device having a length with edges defining a portion of an arc having the same curvature as the reaction vesεel carouεel. 167. The reaction veεεel loading device acσording to σlaim 166, wherein the reaction veεεel loading device protruεionε are fitted into the reaction vessel cuvette on one end of the reaction vessel and on a reaction vessel well at an opposite end of the reaction vesεel. 168. The reaction veεεel loading device according to claim 166, wherein (i) the reaction veεεel planar surface, (ii) reaction vessel insertion depresεionε, (iii) reaσtion vesεel well protruεions, and (iv) the reaσtion σuvette protrusionε, are εpaσed apart and aligned for inεertably reσei ing reaσtion vessels whereby onσe the reaσtion vessels are mounted thereon, the reaσtion vesεelε are aligned for drop-in mounting in the reaσtion veεεel σarouεel reσeption openings. 169. The reaσtion vessel loading deviσe aσcording to claim 166, wherein the semi-rigid planar cover compriseε a flexible plastiσ material and the loader is a molded plastic. 170. The reaction vesεel loading device according to claim 166, wherein εaid planar surface terminates in a continuous elevated rim substantially perpendicular to the planar surface, said rim terminating in a planar surface segment subεtantially parallel to the planar surface of the reaction vesεel loading device. 171. The reaction vessel loading device acσording to σlaim 170, wherein the loader rim has elevated segmentε on oppoεing endε of the loader for handling purpoεeε. 172. A reaσtion veεεel loading deviσe for uεe with an automated, σontinuous and random aσσess analytiσal system apparatus capable of multiple assays of a plurality of liquid samples, wherein said system compriseε a front end carouεel aεεembly incluεive of a εample cup carouεel, a reagent pack σarouεel, and a reaσtion veεεel carouεel mounted conσentriσally and εerviced by a tranεfer pipetting meanε εuitable for kitting a reaction vessel, said reaction veεεel loading device compriεing a εemi-rigid planar cover having an upper planar εurface with εpaσed apart vessel insert depresεionε which are inεertable into reaction vesεel openings, said depressions providing a projection for at least one reaction vesεel well and reaction veεεel for receiving a reaction cuvette, cuvette opening, εaid projectionε being aligned to fit into • εaid well or cuvette opening for affixing reaction veεεelε onto the reaction veεεel -loading device, where the mounted reaction veεεelε on the reaction veεεel loading device being appropriately εpaced and aligned for inεertion loading into a reaσtion vesεel carouεel, εaid planar εurface terminating in a continuous elevated rim εubεtantially perpendicular to the planar εurfaσe, εaid rim terminating in a planar εurfaσe εegment being εubεtantially parallel to the planar εurfaσe of the reaction vessel loading deviσe, and the reaction vessel loading, device having a length with edges defining a portion of an arc having the same curvature as the reaction vesεel carouεel. 173. The reaction veεsel loading device according to claim 172, wherein the reaction vesεel loading device iε uεed for loading a plurality of reaction vessels onto the reaction vessel carousel, the reaction vesεel loading device protrusions are fitted into the reaction vesεel cuvette on one end of the reaction veεεel and on a reaction veεεel well at an oppoεite end of the reaction vessel. 174. The reaσtion vesεel loading deviσe aσσording to σlaim 172, wherein (i) the reaσtion vesεel planar surfaσe, (ii) the reaσtion vessel insertion depressions, (iii) the reaσtion vesεel well protrusions, and (iv) the reaσtion cuvette protrusions are spaced apart and aligned for ale receiving reaction vessels whereby once the reaction vesεelε are mounted thereon, the reaction vessels are aligned for drop-in mounting in the reaction vessel carousel reception openings. 175. The reaction veεεel loading device acσording to σlaim 172, wherein the loader rim has elevated segmentε on opposing ends of the loader for handling purpoεeε. 176. The reaσtion veεεel loading deviσe aσσording to σlaim 172, wherein the loading deviσe with reaction veεεelε mounted thereto iε poεitioned and εnapped into the reaction veεεel σarouεel reσeption openingε and the reaσtion veεεel loading deviσe iε removed from the reaσtion veεεelε by an upward motion to thereby εlide the loader mounting means from σontaσt with the open well and cuvette, whereby the reaction vesεelε are held in a εnail position on the reaction veεεel carouεel. 177. An automated, continuous and random access analytical εyεtem apparatus capable of multiple aεsays of a plurality of liquid εampleε comprising: a front end carousel asεembly incluεive of a sample cup carousel, a reagent pack carousel and a reaction vessel carousel mounted concentrically and serviced by a transfer pipetting means suitable for kitting a reaction vesεel; a reaction vessel loading device, said reaction vesεel loading device for loading a plurality of reaσtion veεεels onto a reaction vessel σarousel σomprising a semi-rigid planar σover having an upper planar surfffce with εpaσed apart veεεel inεert depreεεionε whiσh are inεertable into reaσtion veεεel openingε, εaid depressionε providing a projeσtion for at leaεt one reaσtion veεsel well and σuvette opening, said projeσtionε being aligned to fit into εaid well and cuvette opening for affixing reaction vessels onto the reaction vesεel loading device, the mounted reaction veεεels on* the reaction vesεel loading device being appropriately εpaced and aligned for Con loading into a reaσtion veεεel carousel, the reaction vessel loading device having a length with edges defining a portion of an arσ having the εame curvature as the reaction veεεel carouεel; a tranεfer εtation providing meanε for tranεferring a kitted reaction veεεel to a proceεε carouεel, the proσeεε σarouεel maintained within a σontrol environment; proσess σarousel transferring pipetting means suitable for mixing reagents with the sample in a reaction well of the reaction vesεel; means for transferring the resulting reaction mixture to one of at least two asεay reader means; means for transferring a reaction vesεel from the aεεay reader to a tranεfer station; and means asεoσiated with εaid tranεfer εtation for removing the diεpoεable reaction veεεel from the εyεtem. 178. A method for loading a plurality of reaction veεεelε into a reaction vessel carousel of an automated, σontinuouε and random aσσeεε analytiσal εystem σapable of εimultaneouεly effeσting multiple aεεayε of a plurality of liquid εampleε, εaid method σompriεing the εteps of: providing multiple reaction veεεelε removably mounted on mounting meanε of a reaction veεεel loading device, the loader having a continuous planar εurfaσed with εpaσed apart aligned reaction veεεel opening depresεionε wherein εaid depressions have protrusions suitable for fitting into the opening of at least one reaction vesεel well and a reaction vessel cuvette, the reaσtion vesεel loading deviσe having an arσ configuration of the reaction veεεel depressions mateable with the reaction vessel carousel and reaction vessel receiving means; positioning the reaction vesεel loading device and removably mounted reaction vessels thereon over a reaction vessel carousel; mating the arced reaction vessel loading device and mounte.d reaction vessels with the matching radius of curvature of the reaction vesεel σarousel; inεerting the plurality of reaction veεεelε into reεpeσtive εlotε in the reaσtion veεεel σarouεel; εnapping the reaction veεεelε into poεition into holding means on the reaσtion vesεel σarouεel; and removing the εlidably mounted reaσtion veεεelε from the reaσtion vessel loading deviσe by withdrawing the loader from the reaσtion vessels. 179. A temperature control apparatuε for reaction and incubation zone of a continuouε analytical εystem, σomprising: a duσting and flow σha ber air inlet; a heating means for heating the air in the duσting approximal to the air inlet; an air flow driving meanε poεitioned downεtream from the hearing means; a system of duσts in σommuniσation with the inlet, heating means and air flow driving means mounted in a base plate of the analytiσal syεtem; ducting means for directing heated air flow to the reaction and incubation zone of the analytical system carousels to an underside of the carousels; temperature sensor in σommuniσation with a σontroller ' means for regulating the heating means; said ducting means in communiσation with the flow σhamber above the carousels; said duσting means and flow σhamber σombined to provide reduσtion air flow above the σarouεelε; and multiple air flow exit means from the flow chamber to an exit ducting. 180. The temperature control apparatus according to claim 179 wherein the air flow driving means is comprised of a fan which is positioned between the air inlet and the heating means. 181. The temperature σontrol apparatus according to claim 180 wherein the fan is a variable speed fan responεive to the temperature εenεor and controller meanε for regulating the heating meanε and fan εpeed. 182. The temperature σontrol apparatuε aσσording to σlaim 179 wherein the apparatuε through the duσting and flow σhamber provideε the reaσtion and inσubation zone of the continuouε analytical system with single pass air flow. 183. The temperature control apparatus according to claim 179 wherein the ducting and flow chamber provides the reaction and incubation zone of the continuous analytical syεtem with circulation of the heated air up to about 50% of the total air circulation requirement. 184. The temperature control apparatuε according to claim 179 wherein the heating meanε iε compriεed of at leaεt one eleσtrical resistant heating element positioned in the air flow path ducting means. 185. The temperature control apparatus acσording to claim 179 wherein the ducting and flow σhamber air inlet is provided with filter means. 186. The temperature σontrol apparatus aσσording to σlaim 179 wherein the flow chamber haε poεitioned prior to the multiple air flow exit meanε an ambient air entry with an air flow driving meanε for introducing ambient air directly on to fluidicε heater blocks for cooling purposes. 187. A method for controlling temperature of reaction and incubation zoneε of a σontinuouε analytiσal εystem, comprising: introducing air into ducting and the reaction and incubation zones of the syεtem; heating the introduced air in the ducting flow path before introduction of the air to the reaction and incubation zoneε; driving the introduced and heated air into the reaction and incubation zoneε. to an underεide portion of carouselε of the εyεtem, the driving providing turbulent flow, high preεεure drop in the zone below the carousels; temperature sensing and control means for regulating the heating of the introduced air; reducing the air flow by expansion into a flow chamber above the carousels to a minimum air flow sufficient only to maintain temperature within the chamber above the carouεelε; avoiding evaporation of reagentε and εample fluids contained in the carouεelε and expoεed to the flow chamber atmoεphere; and exiting the air flow from the chamber through multiple exit po.rtε. 188. The method aσcording to claim 187 wherein the sensing means σontrolε the heating meanε aε well as the driving means volume capacity. 189. The method acσording to σlaim 187 wherein the heated air flowing through the duσting is firs t introduσed under turbulent flow σonditions to σarous el undersideε in the reaction and incubation zone, adj uεting the temperatureε of theεe zoneε aε qui ckly as posεible. 190. The method according to claim 189 wherein temperature variations are minimized within the reaction and incubation zone by air flow volume and temperature control in order to acσommodate the σonstant σhangeε oσσurring within the reaσtion and inσubation zone of the σontinuouε random access system. 191. A method of operating an automated, continuous and random accesε analytical εyεtem capable of simultaneouεly effecting multiple aεε ayε of a plurality of liquid εampleε , compriεing: εcheduling variouε aεεayε of a plurality of liquid εampleε ; σreating one or more unit doεe diεpoε ables by separately trans ferring a first of said liquid sampl es and reagents to a reaction veεεel without initiation of an aεεay reaction εequence; tranεferring one or more of εaid unit doεe disposables to a proσessing workstation; mixing an aliquot of said first liquid sample with one or more of said reagents at different times in said reaction vessel to form a first reaction mixture; mixing aliquots of the εame or different one or more εampleε with one or more of εaid reagentε at different timeε in different reaction veεsels to form multiple, independently scheduled reaσtion mixtures; incubating said multiple reaction mixtures simultaneously and independently; introduσing air into the * duσting flow path before introduσtion of the air to the reaction and incubation zones; heating the introduced air in the ducting flow path before introduction of the air to the reaction and incubation zones; driving the introduced and heated air into the reaction and incubation zones to an underside portion of carouselε of the system, the driving providing turbulent flow, high pressure drop in the zone below the ca.rouselε; temperature sensing and control means for regulating the heating of the introduced air; reducing the air flow by expansion into a flow chamber above the carousels to a minimum air flow εuffiσient only to maintain temperature within the σhamber above the carouεelε; avoiding evaporation of reagents and sample fluids contained in the carouselε and expoεed to the flow chamber atmoεphere; exiting the air flow from the chamber through multiple exit portε; performing more than one εcheduled assay on said reaction mixtures in any order in which more than scheduled asεays are presented; and analyzing said incubated reaction mixtures independently and individually by at least two assay procedures. 192. A heater aεεembly for precision temperature and delivery control of liquids, said assembly comprising a body having internal resiεtance heating meanε and temperature control meanε, said body having a cavity suitable for acσommodating liquid tubing means, said liquid tubing means in σommuniσation with liquid inlet and outlet meanε, wherein said σavity is suitable for housing a tubing means for maintaining liquids at a predetermined temperature, and wherein said liquid outlet means is suitable for forced or gravity release of the liquids and is mounted directly above analytical means for receiving liquids. 193. The heater assembly according to claim 192, wherein said predetermined temperature is from between about ± 1 * C and about ± 0.5"C of a required temperature of said liquid. 194. The heater assembly according to claim 192, wherein the temperature control means σomprises a thermistor and thermostat for σontrolling the electrical energy provided to the electriσal resiεtanσe heating meanε. 195. The heater aεεembly according to claim 192, wherein the liquid outlet means is positioned below the lower planar surface of the liquid heater block to thereby provide minimum air gap release to analytical means having openings on a parallel plane. 196. The heater assembly according to claim 195, wherein the air gap is from between about 1/2 inch and about 3/8 inch. 197. The heater asεembly aσσording to σlaim 192, wherein εaid body is metal. 198. The liquid heater block assembly acσording to claim 192, wherein the resistance heating means compriεes multiple loop electrical resistive heating element. 199. An automated, continuouε and random access analytical system capable of simultaneously effecting multiple asεays -Of a plurality of liquid samples, comprising: a front end carousel assembly inclusive of sample cup carousel, reagent pack carousel and reaction vesεel carouεel, the reaction veεsel carouεel being σonσentriσally mounted exterior of the reagent pack σarouεel and the reagent paσk σarouεel being concentrically mounted exterior of the εample cup carouεel; meanε for rotating the reεpeσtive carousels to align with a kitting pipettor means for kitting reaction vesselε; means for transferring kitted reaction vesεelε from a reaction vessel carousel to a transfer station, the transfer station providing means for tranεferring the reaction veεsel to a process carousel, the procesε carousel having environmental means for maintaining temperature control and timing of reaction incubation; a transfer pipettor means for servicing the proσesε σarouεel and a cartridge wheel carouεel offεet from the proceεs carousel, the cartridge wheel carousel having means for receiving pipetted reaction mixtures from the procesε carousel and analytical means for receiving liquids from a heater asεembly, εaid heater assembly comprising a metal body having internal resiεtance beating.meanε and temperature σontrol means, said body having a cavity suitable for acσommodating liquid tubing means, said liquid tubing means in communication ith liquid inlet and outlet means, wherein said σavity is suitable for housing a tubing means for maintaining liquids at a predetermined temperature, and wherein said liquid outlet means is εuitable for forσed or gravity releaεe of the liquids and iε mounted direσtly above the analytiσal meanε for reσeiving the liquids; means for supplying σartridges to the proσess σarousel; a miσroparticle enzyme immunoassay reader and procesεing εtation integrated with the process carousel; a fluorescent polarization immunoassay reader and procesε εtation integrated with the proceεs carousel; means for removing the reaction vesεel from the proceεε carouεel by operation of the tranεfer station and means for removing the cartridges from the cartridge wheel carousel; and meanε for analyzing the reaction mixture either by fluorescent polarization immunoassay or microparticle immunoasεay. 200. The εystem according to claim 199, wherein the predetermined temperature is from between about ± l'C and about + 0.5 * C. 201. A cartridge feeder apparatuε for automated diagnoεtic εystemε, σompriεing: a σartridge hopper meanε for reσeiving, εtoring and feeding σartridgeε to a σartridge orientation mechaniεm; the σartridge orientation meσhaniεm σompriεed of two oppoεed engageable orientation meanε for engaging and diεengaging a cartridge at each end of the cartridge; and the cartridge having a funnel opening at a firεt end and a generally flat bottom at a εecond end. 202. The apparatuε according to claim 201 wherein the engaging orientation means have the εame engaging surfaces including a rounded or blunt protrusion aligned on the axiε of the σartridge making a flat εurface contaσt with the σartridge bottom or being mateable with the funnel opening of the cartridge, the engaging meanε having armε or ring memberε εpaced from the engaging meanε protruεion which acσommodate the exterior wallε of the σartridge in approximate poεition overlap on the engaging member whiσh engages the funnel opening end of the σartridge. 203. The apparatuε aσσording to σlaim 202 wherein the orientation engaging memberε are σapable of orientating cartridges received in either horizontal orientation because of the same configuration of the opposed engaging members. 204. The cartridge feeder apparatus according to claim 201 wherein the cartridge hopper means has parallel walls for defining a somewhat flat hopper means to accommodate cartridges end to end, the hopper means having edge walls which slope inwardly at a lower portion toward a hopper opening capable of releasing one cartridge at a time to the orientation mechanism. 205. The cartridge feeder apparatus according to claim 204 wherein the hopper meanε for receiving, storing and feeding cartridges to a σartridge orientation mechanism and a cartridge wheel has an enlarged upper portion which is open for receiving a cartridge filled carton for unloading numerous cartridgeε 'into the hopper enlarged open upper end; the hopper having a εloped lower portion focuεing on a σartridge releaεe opening. 206. The σartridge feeder apparatuε aσσording to σlaim 201 wherein the hopper means has two spaced apart roller pins mounted in an upper portion of the hopper means for aσσommodating the cartridge loaded cartons with a central break apart element which allows the cartons once the break apart occurs, to ride along the spaced apart roller pins for discharging the numerous cartridges contained in the σarton. 207. The σartridge feeder apparatus according to claim 206 wherein the roller pins promote carton break open along a predefined break open line generally in the σenter portion of the σarton for self-releaεing of σartridgeε from the σarton aε the σarton rideε on the roller pinε. 208. The σartridge feeder apparatuε according to claim 207 wherein the carton has a tear εtrip opening meanε along a center portion of the σarton leaving the carton intact along one edge, opened or partially opened carton opening fully on the roller pinε for unloading cartridgeε. 209. The cartridge feeder apparatus according to claim 201 wherein the hopper means is detachable and σapable of εtand alone during cartridge loading, the εtand alone hopper having a raised central region for receiving cartonε σontaining cartridgeε which break open and ride on the roller pins for unloading the cartridges, the hopper further comprised of a transparent mid-region section with indication markers thereon to indicate cartridge numbers remaining in the hopper based on cartridge level within the hopper. 210. A method for feeding multiple cartridges to a σartridge feeder apparatus useful in automated diagnostic syεtemε, compriεing: feeding multiple σartridges from a εelf- opening σarton into a σartridge hopper having σapacity for receiving, εtoring and feeding cartridgeε one by one to a cartridge orientation meσhaniεm, orientating the individual σartridges to a bottom down position before feeding the orientated σartridge to a σartridge wheel for proσessing; the cartridge orientation mechaniεm functioning to orientate the individual cartridgeε in a bottom down orientation independently of the horizontal orientating cartridges as received from the hopper. 211. A device for holding and dispenεing a plurality of cylindriσal σartridgeε having a longitudinal axiε, σompriεing: a σontainer, εaid σontainer σonεtruσted to hold εaid plurality of σylindriσal cartridgeε with εaid longitudinal axiε of εaid plurality of cylindriσal σartridgeε diεpoεed in a εubεtantially parallel direσtion; a hinge meanε, εaid hinge means dispoεed on a firεt εide of εaid σontainer; a removable tab, εaid removable tab diεpoεed on a εeσond εide of εaid σontainer; and wherein said σontainer has a plurality of means for εeparating εaid σontainer that σonnect εaid hinge meanε to εaid removable tab. 212. The device acσording to claim 211, wherein εaid container is a cardboard box. 213. A method of loading a plurality of cylindriσal cartridgeε having a longitudinal axis, into a hopper, said method comprising the steps of: forming a container, having a hinge means disposed on a first side, a removable tab on a second side, and a plurality of separation means connecting said hinge means., to εaid tab thereby defining a εeparation opening in εaid container; placing a plurality of σylindriσal σartridges within said σontainer; removing said tab from said σontainer; positioning said σontainer with said second side facing an area of said hopper for receiving said σylindriσal σartridges; and applying a forσe to εaid σontainer εufficient to εeparate said plurality of separation means, wherein said force opens said container at said separation opening by pivoting about said hinge means. 214. The method aε εet forth in claim 213, wherein εaid εtep of forming εaid container includes forming said container to hold said plurality of cylindrical cartridges with said longitudinal axiε of said cylindrical cartridges disposed in a subεtantially parallel direction. 215. The method as εet forth in claim 213, including the εtep of diεpoεing a plurality of container supports within said hopper, and wherein said step of positioning said container includes resting said second side of said container on said plurality of container supports on said hopper; and εaid εtep of applying a forσe to εaid container includeε applying said force on said first side of said container. 216. The method as set forth in claim 213, wherein said step of forming a container includes forming a σardboard box as said σontainer. 217. An opticε control εyεtem for uεe in a continuous and random aσcess analytical system controlled by a central procesεor capable of running at leaεt two aεεays simultaneouεly on a plurality of liquid εampleε, each aεsay being conduσted on an asεay subsyεtem having a source of energy for radiating a sample at a predetermined intensity level and a detector for sensing that portion of the radiation affected by the sample and providing a sample-data signal corresponding the radiation senεed, εaid optics control syεtem compriεing: meanε incorporated into eaσh aεεay εubεystem for sensing the intensity of energy radiating the sample and providing an intensity-level signal corresponding to intensity sensed; means connected to the detector of each asεay subsyεtem for receiving and digitizing the εample-data εignalε from the detectorε; and σontrol meanε reεponεive to the inten ' sity- level εignalε and the εample-data signals for adjusting the intensity of the sourσe of eaσh εubεyεtem to the predetermined intenεity and for σommuniσating with the σentral proσeεεor to receive εignalε from the central processor identifying the predetermined intensity levels and to transmit the digitized sample-data signals to the σentral processor for the analytiσal system; whereby the σapaσity of the central processor iε sufficiently increased to support the continuous operation of the analytical system. 218. The opticε σontrol system of claim 217, wherein one of the assays is a FPIA assay being conducted on a FPIA subsystem having a source of energy provided by a tungsten lamp and a liquid crystal for changing the polarization of the light illuminating the sample, and wherein said control means receives signals from the central-proσesεor for changing the εtate of the liquid cryεtal between perpendicular polarization fieldε. 219. The- . opticε control syεtem of claim 218, wherein εaid control meanε receives signals from the contraσt proσesεor for changing the intensity of the tungεten lamp between a εimmer state and a burn state. 220. The optics control system of claim 218, wherein one of the assays in a MEIA assay being conduσted on a MEIA εubεyεtem having a source of energy provided by a mercury vapor lamp. 221. The opticε σontrol system of σlaim 220, wherein said σontrol means receives signals from the central procesεor for changing the intensity of the mercury vapor lamp between a simmer state and a burn state. 222. The optics control syεtem of claim 221, further σompriεing meanε positioned in thermal σontaσt with the merσury vapor lamp for maintaining the temperature of the lamp suffiσiently σlose to its thermal operating point to facilitate a rapid increase to the burn state. 223. A method for controlling evaporation and contamination of reagents used in automated analytiσal instrumentε, compriεing: positioning reagent packε containing reagents in closed reagent containers to an opening and closing station, said reagent containers having evaporatively closed closure and cap means; opening the evaporatively closed closure and cap means to an open position with the opening and closing station; withdrawing reagents from the reagent containers; and closing the closure and cap means to form an evaporatively closed seal on said reagent containers. 224. The method according to claim 223 wherein said closure and cap means provide a soft closing which creates an evaporatively sealed condition, for repeated opening and cloεing of εaid reagent containers with said closure. 225. The method according to claim 223 wherein the closing of said reagent container with said closure and .cap means creates an evaporatively sealed σondition for handling and shipping. 226. The method according to claim 223 wherein the reagent pack contains at least two reagent containers and the reagent containers share a closure and cap meanε unit wherein individual σaps are positioned for σlosure onto the individual containers. 227. The method according to claim 223 wherein the reagent containers contained in a reagent pack compriεe individual σloεure and σap means mounted on an individual reagent σontainer. 228. The method aσcording to claim 223 wherein the reagent container closure and cap means provides a cap and seal which provide both soft and hard evaporatively sealed conditions of the reagent container by forming a ring seal around a neck portion of the reagent container opening. 229. The method according to claim 223 wherein the opening and closing station provides a forced opening of the evaporatively sealed reagent containers by action of opening pins which a portion of the closure and cap means, the contaσt being made beyond a pivot point on the σlosure and σap means whiσh provides a mounting σonneσtion to an edge of the reagent σontainer, whereby εaid σontaσting by the opening pinε with εaid portion of closure and cap means pivot provides for opening of said closure and cap means; moving the closure and cap means into a open position by contaσting reagent pack closure actuator members with portion of said open closure and cap means forcing the σlosure and cap means to a position beyond the vertical and spring locking the closure and cap means into an open position; withdrawing reagents from the reagent container; σlosing εaid σloεure and σap meanε to form an evaporatively εealed σonditionε on εaid reagent σontainer. 230. A method of operating an automated, σontinuouε and random access analytical syεtem σapable of εimultaneouεly affecting multiple aεsays of a plurality of liquid sampleε, compriεing: εcheduling various assayε of a plurality of liquid samples; creating one or more unit dose disposables by separately transferring a firεt of εaid liquid samples and reagentέ to a reaction veεεel without initiation of an aεεay reaction sequence; providing a method for opening and cloεing evaporatively sealed reagent container by opening a cover including a σap pivotally mounted on the reagent σontainer and looking the cover and cap in an open position and moving the open reagent container to a position for withdrawing reagent from the reagent container, returning the open reagent container to the open and closing station for closing of the reagent σontainer cover and cap forming an evaporatively sealed closure; transferring one or more .of said unit dose disposables to a processing work station; mixing an aliquot of said first liquid sample with one or more of said reagents at different times in said reaσtion vesεel to form a first reaσtion mixture; mixing aliquots of the same or different one or more sampleε with one or more of εaid reagents at different timeε of different reaction vessels to form multiple independently scheduled reaction mixtures; inσubating said multiple reaσtion mixtures simultaneouεly and independently; performing more than one εσheduled assay on said reaσtion-mixtures in any order in whiσh more than -sσheduled assayε are presented; and analyzing εaid inσubated reaσtion mixtures independently and individually by at leaεt two " assay proσedureε. 231. An apparatuε for opening and cloεing reagent σontainerε σontained within a reagent paσk having σloεure and σap meanε for σontrol of evaporation and σontamination of reagentε uεed in automated diagnostic systems, comprising: reagent σontainers having mounted thereon a pivotal σloεure and cap means, the pivot being the mounting point on an edge of the reagent container; an opening and closing εtation whiσh provides reagent paσk opening pinε for σontaσting the reagent paσk σover meanε portion whiσh extendε beyond the pivot and the reagent paσk; εpring means within the cover and cap means for maintaining said closure and cap means in an open position; reagent pack means containing at least two reagent containers mounted within a reagent pack carousel for movement to and from the opening and closing station; and reagent pack closure actuator means for moving said closure and cap means onto said closure and cap means to form an evaporatively sealed σlosure. 232. The apparatus aσσording to σlaim 231 wherein the closure and cap means has a cap portion on one side of a pivot means of the σlosure and σap means, the closure and σap means being mounted to said edge of said σlosure and σap means and the σlosure and σap means extending subεtantially beyond the pivot means; the σlosure and σap means σomprised of a cap member which extendε from the cloεure and cap meanε for inεertion into the container opening of said reagent container and a spaced apart projecting ring member which σloεeε around the reagent σontainer. 233. The apparatus according to claim 231 wherein the reagent pack σlosure actuator meanε iε compriεed of an engageable εurface for cloεing the reagent containerε when εaid closure and cap meanε are positioned substantially above said opening to thereby close said reagent containers. 234. The apparatus according to claim 231 wherein the reagent container opening pins are engageable for contacting the closure and cap means at a position beyond the reagent container closure and cap means pivot means, the opening pins moving the closure and cap means to an open position by extension of the opening pins. 235. The apparatus according to claim 231 wherein the opening and σlosing εtation has a housing and a drive means thereon, the housing has a mounting means for fixing the opening and closing station to a position above a reagent pack carousel which moves the reagent containers to the opening and closing station for either opening the closure and cap means or closing the closure and cap means, the reagent container closure actuator means and the reagent container opening pinε are engageable to contact the cloεure and cap meanε at various positions for opening the closure and cap means, locking the closure and cap means in an open position and moving the locked open closure and cap means to a partially closed position and force closing of the closure and cap means; reagent container closure and σap means providing a unit cover means supporting multiple cap means, the reagent σontainer opening pins and σlosure actuator means are operated simultaneously when activated for opening and closing of reagent container closure and cap means. 236. An apparatus for opening and closing reagent containers in an automatic diagnostic system, said apparatus comprising: reagent pack means comprising a plurality of reagent containers, said reagent containers including closure and cap meanε for σontrol of evaporation and σontamination of liquid reagents contained in said reagent containers, said cloεure and cap means being pivotably mounted to an edge of a container opening of said reagent container by pivot means wherein said closure and cap means further include a portion which extends beyond said edge and said pivot means, said closure and cap means comprising spring means for maintaining said closure and cap means in an open position; and an opening and σlosing station σomprising reagent paσk opening pinε for contacting εaid cloεure and σap meanε at εaid extended portion to move εaid σloεure and σap meanε from evaporatively cloεed poεition to an open poεition.

Inventors: CLARK FREDERICK L, CLEMENS JOHN M, HANCE ROBERT B, HENDRICK KENDALL B, KANEWSKE WILLIAM J III, LAGOCKI PETER A, MARTIN RICHARD R, TAYI APPARAO, CLARK, FREDERICK, L., CLEMENS, JOHN, M., HANCE, ROBERT, B., HENDRICK, KENDALL, B., KANEWSKE, WILLIAM, J., III, LAGOCKI, PETER, A., MARTIN, RICHARD, R., TAYI, APPARAO
Applicants: ABBOTT LAB, ABBOTT LABORATORIES
Application year: 1994
Main classification: G01N35
IPC codes: B01F11, B01L3, B29C45, G01F23, G01N1, G01N21, G01N33, G01N35, H01J49